Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command ... · Release 3 October 2002 Customer...
Transcript of Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command ... · Release 3 October 2002 Customer...
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)Release 3October 2002
Corporate HeadquartersCisco Systems, Inc.170 West Tasman DriveSan Jose, CA 95134-1706 USAhttp://www.cisco.comTel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)Fax: 408 526-4100
Customer Order Number: DOC-7814255=Text Part Number: Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCIP, the Cisco Arrow logo, the Cisco Powered Network mark, the Cisco Systems Verified logo, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, iQ Breakthrough, iQ Expertise, iQ FastTrack, the iQ Logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, Networking Academy, ScriptShare, SMARTnet, TransPath, and Voice LAN are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, Discover All That’s Possible, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaStack, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, LightStream, MGX, MICA, the Networkers logo, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, RateMUX, Registrar, SlideCast, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Web site are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0208R)
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)Copyright © 2002, Cisco Systems, Inc.All rights reserved.
Cisco Reader Comment CardGeneral Information1 Years of networking experience: Years of experience with Cisco products:
2 I have these network types: LAN Backbone WANOther:
3 I have these Cisco products: Switches RoutersOther (specify models):
4 I perform these types of tasks: H/W installation and/or maintenance S/W configurationNetwork management Other:
5 I use these types of documentation: H/W installation H/W configuration S/W configurationCommand reference Quick reference Release notes Online helpOther:
6 I access this information through: Cisco.com (CCO) CD-ROMPrinted docs Other:
7 I prefer this access method:
8 I use the following three product features the most:
Document InformationDocument Title: Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Part Number: 78-14255-01 S/W Release: 3
On a scale of 1–5 (5 being the best), please let us know how we rate in the following areas:
Please comment on our lowest scores:
Mailing InformationCompany Name Date
Contact Name Job Title
Mailing Address
City State/Province ZIP/Postal Code
Country Phone ( ) Extension
Fax ( ) E-mail
Can we contact you further concerning our documentation? Yes No
You can also send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected], or by fax to 408-527-8089.
The document is written at my technical level of understanding.
The information is accurate.
The document is complete. The information I wanted was easy to find.
The information is well organized. The information I found was useful to my job.
% %% %
BUSINESS REPLY MAILF I R S T - C L A S S M A I L P E R M I T N O . 4 6 3 1 S A N J O S E C A
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
NO POSTAGENECESSARY
IF MAILEDIN THE
UNITED STATES
DOCUMENT RESOURCE CONNECTIONCISCO SYSTEMS INC170 WEST TASMAN DRSAN JOSE CA 95134-9916
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration GuidRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
C O N T E N T S
Preface xi
Objectives xi
Audience xi
Organization xi
Related Documentation xii
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 xii
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 xiii
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 xv
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 xvi
SES PNNI Controller Release 3 xvii
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 xviii
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 xix
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xix
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xx
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 xxi
Conventions xxii
Obtaining Documentation xxiii
World Wide Web xxiii
Documentation CD-ROM xxiii
Ordering Documentation xxiii
Documentation Feedback xxiii
Obtaining Technical Assistance xxiv
Cisco.com xxiv
Technical Assistance Center xxv
Cisco TAC Web Site xxv
Cisco TAC Escalation Center xxv
C H A P T E R 1 Introduction 1-1
FRSM Card Types 1-1
Common FRSM Card Features 1-2
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C 1-3
FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C 1-3
iiie and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Contents
FRSM-HS2/B 1-4
FRSM-HS2/B with Eight X.21 or V.35 Interfaces 1-4
FRSM-HS2/B with Two HSSI Interfaces 1-4
C H A P T E R 2 Provisioning Communications Links 2-1
Preparing for Provisioning 2-2
Quickstart Provisioning Procedures 2-2
FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Line Configuration Quickstart 2-3
Frame Relay Port Configuration Quickstart 2-3
FRSM-to-FRSM SPVC Configuration Quickstart 2-4
FRSM-to-Non-FRSM SPVC Configuration Quickstart 2-4
General FRSM Provisioning Procedures 2-5
Bringing Up Lines 2-6
Configuring FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Lines 2-7
Adding Frame Relay Ports 2-10
Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards 2-13
Configuring the Slave Side of SPVCs 2-14
Configuring the Master Side of SPVCs 2-21
C H A P T E R 3 FRSM Card Management 3-1
Managing CLI Sessions 3-1
Managing Cards 3-2
Distinguishing Between Channelized and Nonchannelized FRSM Cards 3-2
Displaying General Card Information 3-3
Displaying Software Version and Status Information 3-4
Managing Lines 3-4
Displaying a List of Lines 3-5
Displaying the Configuration for a Single Line 3-5
Bringing Down a Line 3-5
Managing Line Alarms 3-6
Managing Ports 3-7
Displaying a List of Ports 3-7
Displaying the Status of a Single Port 3-7
Deleting Ports 3-8
Managing Resource Partitions 3-8
Displaying a Resource Partition Configuration 3-9
Adding a Resource Partition 3-9
Modifying a Resource Partition 3-10
Deleting a Resource Configuration 3-10
ivCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Contents
Managing Connections 3-11
Displaying a List of Connections 3-11
Displaying the Status of a Single Connection 3-11
Deleting Connections 3-13
Testing a Connection 3-13
Testing with tstcon 3-13
Testing with tstdelay 3-14
Testing with cnftrafficgen 3-14
C H A P T E R 4 FRSM Command Reference 4-1
? 4-6
addchanloop 4-7
addcon 4-8
addln 4-15
addlnloop 4-16
addport 4-17
addrscprtn 4-19
addspvc 4-21
chkflash 4-27
clear 4-28
clralm 4-29
clralmcnt 4-30
clralmcnts 4-31
clralms 4-32
clrcderrs 4-33
clrchancnt 4-34
clrchancnts 4-35
clrmsgcnt 4-36
clrportcnt 4-37
clrportcnts 4-38
clrsarcnt 4-39
clrsarcnts 4-40
clrscrn 4-41
clrslftst 4-42
clrtaskinfo 4-43
cls 4-44
vCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Contents
cnfchan 4-45
cnfchanabrparams 4-46
cnfchanabrrates 4-48
cnfchancacoff 4-49
cnfchanegressq 4-50
cnfchaneir 4-52
cnfchaningressq 4-53
cnfchanmap 4-54
cnfchanpol 4-56
cnfchansrvrate 4-58
cnfchanstdabr 4-59
cnfclktype 4-61
cnfcon 4-62
cnfegrq 4-64
cnfegrservtype 4-65
cnfln 4-66
cnflnloop 4-68
cnfm32eqthresh 4-69
cnfoamlpbk 4-70
cnfport 4-72
cnfportcllm 4-74
cnfrscprtn 4-75
cnfslftst 4-77
cnfstdabrctrl 4-78
cnftrafficgen 4-79
cnfunit391 4-81
copychans 4-82
copyports 4-84
cpstobps 4-85
delchan 4-86
delchanloop 4-87
delchans 4-88
delcon 4-89
delln 4-90
dellnloop 4-91
viCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Contents
delport 4-92
delports 4-93
delrscprtn 4-94
dncon 4-95
dspalm 4-96
dspalmcnf 4-97
dspalmcnt 4-98
dspalms 4-99
dspbufoverflow 4-100
dspcd 4-101
dspcderrs 4-103
dspchan 4-104
dspchancnt 4-106
dspchanmap 4-108
dspchans 4-109
dspchanstdabr 4-110
dspchstats 4-111
dspcon 4-113
dspcons 4-115
dspegrq 4-118
dspegrqs 4-119
dspegrservtype 4-120
dspfeature 4-121
dsplcn 4-122
dspln 4-123
dsplns 4-124
dspm32eqthresh 4-126
dspmaptbl 4-127
dspmsgcnt 4-128
dspoamlpbk 4-129
dspport 4-131
dspportcnt 4-133
dspports 4-135
dspportstats 4-136
dsprscprtn 4-138
viiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Contents
dspsarcnt 4-139
dspsarcnts 4-140
dspservrate 4-142
dspslftst 4-143
dspslftsttbl 4-144
dspstatparms 4-145
dspstdabrctrl 4-146
dsptaskinfo 4-147
dsptotals 4-148
dsptrafficgen 4-150
dspunit391 4-151
Help 4-152
i 4-153
memShow 4-155
myid 4-156
queDsp 4-157
rrtcon 4-158
runslftstno 4-159
setcmdc 4-160
setpagemode 4-161
tstcon 4-162
tstdelay 4-163
upcon 4-164
version 4-165
viiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
T A B L E S
Table 1 Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 Documentation xii
Table 2 WAN CiscoView Release 3 Documentation xii
Table 3 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation xiii
Table 4 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation xv
Table 5 Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation xvi
Table 6 SES PNNI Controller Release 3 Documentation xvii
Table 7 Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation xviii
Table 8 Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 Documentation xix
Table 9 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation xix
Table 10 Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation xx
Table 11 Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation xxi
Table 1-1 FRSM Card Types Supported by PXM1E Controllers 1-1
Table 2-1 Link and Connection Types Applicable to FRSM Cards 2-1
Table 2-2 FRSM Card Types 2-6
Table 2-3 Line Parameters for cnfln Command 2-8
Table 2-4 Parameters for addport Command 2-11
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command 2-15
Table 3-1 Session Management Commands 3-1
Table 3-2 Parameters for the addrscprtn Command 3-9
Table 3-3 Parameters for the cnfrscprtn Command 3-10
Table 3-4 Parameters for the cnftrafficgen Command 3-14
Table 4-1 FRSM Session Management Commands 4-1
Table 4-2 FRSM Card Management Commands 4-1
Table 4-3 FRSM Line Management Commands 4-2
Table 4-4 FRSM Port Management Commands 4-3
Table 4-5 FRSM Resource Partition Management Commands 4-4
Table 4-6 FRSM Connection Management Commands 4-4
Table 4-7 Connection Parameters That Must Match 4-8
ixCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Tables
xCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Preface
This preface describes the objectives, audience, organization, and conventions of the Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E).
ObjectivesThis guide describes how to configure Frame Relay and ATM services on Cisco MGX 8830 and 8850 switches that use the PXM1E processor.
AudienceThe Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E) is written for network operators and administrators who are responsible for MGX 8830 and MGX 8850 switches that provide Frame Relay and ATM services.
OrganizationThe body of this publication is:
Chapter 1 Introduction. This chapter introduces the FRSM cards covered in this guide and their features.
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications Links. This chapter describes how to provision connections between the FRSM cards described in this guide and between these FRSM cards and other types of cards.
Chapter 3 FRSM Card Management. This chapter describes card management tasks you might want to do after provisioning is complete.
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference. This chapter describes the command-line interface (CLI) commands that you can use to configure, provision, and manage the FRSM cards.
xiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Related DocumentationThe following Cisco publications contain additional information related to the operation of this product and associated equipment in a Cisco WAN switching network.
Cisco WAN Manager Release 11The product documentation for the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) network management system for Release 11 is listed in Table 1.
Table 1 Cisco WAN Manager Release 11 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco WAN Manager Installation Guide for Solaris 7, Release 11
DOC-7813567=
Provides procedures for installing Release 11 of the CWM network management system and Release 5.4 of CiscoView on a Solaris 7 platform.
Cisco WAN Manager Installation Guide for Solaris 8, Release 11
DOC-7814230=
Provides procedures for installing Release 11 of the CWM network management system and Release 5.4 of CiscoView on a Solaris 8 platform.
Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide, Release 11
DOC-7813568=
Describes how to use the CWM Release 11 software, which consists of user applications and tools for network management, connection management, network configuration, statistics collection, and security management.
Cisco WAN Manager SNMP Service Agent, Release 11
DOC-7813569=
Provides information about the CWM Simple Network Management Protocol Service Agent, an optional adjunct to CWM that is used for managing Cisco WAN switches using SNMP.
Cisco WAN Manager Database Interface Guide, Release 11
DOC-7813542=
Provides information about accessing the CWM Informix OnLine database that is used to store information about the network elements.
Table 2 WAN CiscoView Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8220 Edge Concentrator, Release 5
DOC-7812768=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco MGX 8220 Edge Concentrator.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8850 Edge Switch, Release 1
DOC-7811242=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco MGX 8850 Edge Switch.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator, Release 1
DOC-7811241=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator.
xiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 3.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway, Release 1
DOC-7810926=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway.
WAN CiscoView for Release 2 of the MGX 8850
DOC-7810349=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for IGX 8400 Switches
DOC-78111243=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco IGX 8400 switch.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for BPX 8600 Switches
DOC-7811244=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco BPX 8600 switch.
WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the BPX SES PNNI Controller
DOC-7812303=
Provides instructions for using this network management software application that allows you to perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks for element management of the Cisco BPX SES1 PNNI2 Controller.
1. SES = Service Expansion Shelf Private Network-to-Network Interface
2. PNNI = Private Network-to-Network Interface
Table 2 WAN CiscoView Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
Table 3 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E) Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814250=
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8850 switch. This guide explains what the switch does and covers site preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The Cisco MGX 8850 switch uses either a PXM45 or a PXM1E controller card and provides support for both broadband and narrowband service modules.
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI1 of the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814788=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and the Cisco MGX 8950 switches with a PXM45 controller to operate as ATM edge or core switches. This guide also provides some operation and maintenance procedures.
xiiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Provides information on all supported MIB2 objects, support restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME, FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for the MGX 8850 FRSM12 Card, Release 3
DOC-7810327=
Describes how to use the high-speed Frame Relay (FRSM-12-T3E3) commands that are available in the CLI of the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) switch.
Cisco AXSM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950, Release 3
DOC-7814257=
This guide explains how to configure the AXSM cards for operation and contains a command reference that describes the AXSM commands in detail. The AXSM cards covered in this manual are the AXSM, AXSM/B, AXSM-E, and AXSM-32-T1E1-E.
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and the Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES3 for PNNI route processing.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 Release 3 switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM4 in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Switches
DOC-7814790=
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
1. CLI = command line interface
2. MIB = Management Information Base
3. SES = Service Expansion Shelf
4. VISM = Voice Interworking Service Module
Table 3 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
xivCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 4.
Table 4 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E) Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814250=
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8850 routing switch. This documentation explains what the switch does and covers site preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The Cisco MGX 8850 switch uses either a PXM45 or a PXM1E controller card and provides support for both broadband and narrowband service modules.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814248=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and the Cisco MGX 8830 switches with PXM1E controller cards to operate as ATM edge switches. This guide also provides some operation and maintenance procedures.
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME, FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
DOC-7814255=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the FRSM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all FRSM commands.
Cisco AUSM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814254=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the AUSM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all AUSM commands.
Cisco CESM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814256=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the CESM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all CESM commands.
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for PNNI route processing.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 Release 3 switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
xvCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 5.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Switches
DOC-7814790=
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Table 4 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
Table 5 Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8950 Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814147=
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8950 core switch. This documentation explains what the switch does and covers site preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The Cisco MGX 8950 switch uses a PXM45/B controller card and provides support for broadband service modules.
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814788=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and the Cisco MGX 8950 switches with a PXM45 controller to operate as ATM edge or core switches. This guide also provides some operation and maintenance procedures.
Cisco AXSM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950, Release 3
DOC-7814257=
This guide explains how to configure the AXSM cards for operation and contains a command reference that describes the AXSM commands in detail. The AXSM cards covered in this manual are the AXSM, AXSM/B, AXSM-E, and AXSM-32-T1E1-E.
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME, FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and the Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for PNNI route processing.
xviCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
SES PNNI Controller Release 3 The product documentation for installing and operating the Service Expansion Shelf (SES) Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) Controller Release 3 is listed in Table 6.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3
OL-2768-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM-XF) in the Cisco MGX 8850 switch Release 3. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Switches
DOC-7814790=
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Table 5 Cisco MGX 8950 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
Table 6 SES PNNI Controller Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814258=
Describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the SES PNNI Controller.
Cisco SES PNNI Controller Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814260=
Provides a description of the commands used to configure and operate the SES PNNI Controller.
Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide
DOC-7813543=
Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), Cisco MGX 8950, and the Cisco BPX 8600 switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switch requires an SES for PNNI route processing.
xviiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 is listed in Table 7.
Table 7 Cisco MGX 8830 Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8830 Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814547=
Describes how to install the Cisco MGX 8830 edge switch. This documentation explains what the switch does and covers site preparation, grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling. The Cisco MGX 8830 switch uses a PXM1E controller card and provides PNNI support for narrowband service modules.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3
DOC-7814248=
Describes how to configure the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and the Cisco MGX 8830 switches with PXM1E controller cards to operate as ATM edge switches. This guide also provides some operation and maintenance procedures.
Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Command Reference, Release 3
DOC-7814789=
Describes the PXM commands that are available on the CLI of the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850, and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
Cisco SNMP Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), MGX 8950, and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814747=
Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support restrictions, and traps for AXSM, AXSM-E, SRM-3T3, SRME, FRSM12, PXM45, PXM1E, RPM-PR, and RPM-XF.
Cisco AUSM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814254=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the AUSM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all AUSM commands.
Cisco CESM Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830, Release 3
DOC-7814256=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the CESM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all CESM commands.
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
DOC-7814255=
Provides software configuration procedures for provisioning connections and managing the FRSM cards supported in this release. Also provides command descriptions for all FRSM commands.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco MGX 8830, MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and MGX 8950 Switches
DOC-7814790=
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety recommendations for the Cisco MGX 8830, Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45 and PXM1E), and Cisco MGX 8950 switches.
xviiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 is listed in Table 8.
Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1The product documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 is listed in Table 9.
Table 8 Cisco WAN Switching Software Release 9.3 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration, Release 9.3.30
DOC-7812907=
Provides a general description and technical details of the Cisco BPX broadband switch.
Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference, Release 9.3.30
DOC-7812906=
Provides detailed information on the general command line interface commands.
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation Guide, Release 9.3.30
OL-1165-01 (online only)
Provides hardware installation and basic configuration information for Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches that are running Switch Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Provisioning Guide, Release 9.3.30
OL-1166-01 (online only)
Provides information for configuration and provisioning of selected services for the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches that are running Switch Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.
9.3.42 Version Software Release Notes Cisco WAN Switching System Software
OL-2911-01 (online only)
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as well as known and resolved anomalies.
Cisco IGX 8400 Series Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
DOC-7813227=
Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and safety recommendations for the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switch.
Table 9 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Installation and Configuration, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811223=
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch.
Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch Command Reference, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811210=
Provides detailed information on the general command line for the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch.
Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch System Error Messages, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811240=
Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
xixCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1The documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 is listed in Table 10.
Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Overview, Release 1.1.3
OL-1154-01 (online only)
Provides a technical description of the system components and functionality of the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch from a technical perspective.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
DOC-7812278=
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1.2.11
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as well as known and resolved anomalies.
Table 9 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1) Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
Table 10 Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Installation and Configuration, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811217=
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch.
Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Command Reference, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811212=
Provides detailed information on the general command line interface commands.
Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Error Messages, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811216=
Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Overview, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811576=
Describes the system components and functionality of the Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch from a technical perspective.
xxCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceRelated Documentation
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1The documentation for installing and operating the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 is listed in Table 11.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
DOC-7812278=
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1.2.11
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as well as known and resolved anomalies.
Table 10 Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
Table 11 Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation
Title Description
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Installation and Configuration, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811215=
Provides installation instructions for the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch.
Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Command Reference, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7811211=
Provides detailed information on the general command line interface commands.
Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Error Messages, Release 1.1.3
DOC-78112113=
Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.
Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Overview, Release 1.1.3
DOC-7812899=
Provides a technical description of the system components and functionality of the Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch from a technical perspective.
Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 1.1
DOC-7812278=
Describes how to install and configure the Cisco MGX Route Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic Cisco IOS configuration information.
xxiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceConventions
ConventionsThis publication uses the following conventions.
Command descriptions use these conventions:
• Commands and keywords are in boldface.
• Arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
• Required command arguments are inside angle brackets (< >).
• Optional command arguments are in square brackets ([ ]).
• Alternative keywords are separated by vertical bars ( | ).
Examples use these conventions:
• Terminal sessions and information the system displays are in screen font.
• Information you enter is in boldface screen font.
• Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets (< >).
• Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets ([ ]).
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the manual.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.
Tips Means the following information will help you solve a problem. The tips information might not be troubleshooting or even an action, but could be useful information, similar to a Timesaver.
Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide, Release 3.0
OL-2521-01 (online only)
Describes how to install and configure VISM in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1), Cisco MGX 8250, and Cisco MGX 8230 switches. Also provides troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and Cisco CLI command configuration information.
Release Notes for Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and MGX 8850 (PXM1) Software Version 1,2.11
OL-2916-01 (online only)
Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as well as known and resolved anomalies.
Table 11 Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Switch Release 1 Documentation (continued)
Title Description
xxiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceObtaining Documentation
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, you must be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. (To see translated versions of this warning, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document that accompanied the product.)
Obtaining DocumentationThese sections explain how to obtain documentation from Cisco Systems.
World Wide WebYou can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
Translated documentation is available at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml
Documentation CD-ROMCisco documentation and additional literature are available in a Cisco Documentation CD-ROM package, which is shipped with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM is updated monthly and may be more current than printed documentation. The CD-ROM package is available as a single unit or through an annual subscription.
Ordering DocumentationYou can order Cisco documentation in these ways:
• Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl
• Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through the online Subscription Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription
• Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, U.S.A.) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387).
Documentation FeedbackYou can submit comments electronically on Cisco.com. In the Cisco Documentation home page, click the Fax or Email option in the “Leave Feedback” section at the bottom of the page.
You can e-mail your comments to [email protected].
xxiiiCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceObtaining Technical Assistance
You can submit your comments by mail by using the response card behind the front cover of your document or by writing to the following address:
Cisco SystemsAttn: Document Resource Connection170 West Tasman DriveSan Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
Obtaining Technical AssistanceCisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can obtain online documentation, troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from online tools by using the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) Web Site. Cisco.com registered users have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site.
Cisco.comCisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that provides immediate, open access to Cisco information, networking solutions, services, programs, and resources at any time, from anywhere in the world.
Cisco.com is a highly integrated Internet application and a powerful, easy-to-use tool that provides a broad range of features and services to help you with these tasks:
• Streamline business processes and improve productivity
• Resolve technical issues with online support
• Download and test software packages
• Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise
• Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs
If you want to obtain customized information and service, you can self-register on Cisco.com. To access Cisco.com, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
xxivCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceObtaining Technical Assistance
Technical Assistance CenterThe Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a Cisco product, technology, or solution. Two levels of support are available: the Cisco TAC Web Site and the Cisco TAC Escalation Center.
Cisco TAC inquiries are categorized according to the urgency of the issue:
• Priority level 4 (P4)—You need information or assistance concerning Cisco product capabilities, product installation, or basic product configuration.
• Priority level 3 (P3)—Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is noticeably impaired, but most business operations continue.
• Priority level 2 (P2)—Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant aspects of business operations. No workaround is available.
• Priority level 1 (P1)—Your production network is down, and a critical impact to business operations will occur if service is not restored quickly. No workaround is available.
The Cisco TAC resource that you choose is based on the priority of the problem and the conditions of service contracts, when applicable.
Cisco TAC Web Site
You can use the Cisco TAC Web Site to resolve P3 and P4 issues yourself, saving both cost and time. The site provides around-the-clock access to online tools, knowledge bases, and software. To access the Cisco TAC Web Site, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac
All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco service contract have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC Web Site. The Cisco TAC Web Site requires a Cisco.com login ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or password, go to this URL to register:
http://www.cisco.com/register/
If you are a Cisco.com registered user, and you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco TAC Web Site, you can open a case online by using the TAC Case Open tool at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen
If you have Internet access, we recommend that you open P3 and P4 cases through the Cisco TAC Web Site.
Cisco TAC Escalation Center
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses priority level 1 or priority level 2 issues. These classifications are assigned when severe network degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer automatically opens a case.
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
xxvCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
PrefaceObtaining Technical Assistance
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the level of Cisco support services to which your company is entitled: for example, SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). When you call the center, please have available your service agreement number and your product serial number.
xxviCisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and CommanRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
C H A P T E R 1
IntroductionThis chapter introduces the FRSM cards that are supported by the PXM1E card in MGX 8850 and MGX 8830 switches. This chapter also describes the features of these cards.
FRSM Card TypesWhen operating under control of the PXM1E card, the MGX 8850 and MGX 8830 switches support the FRSM cards listed in Table 1-1.
The FRSM cards described in this manual are single-height service modules that enable Frame Relay communications over an ATM network. The FRSM cards typically connect to a Frame Relay router. Communications from the Frame Relay router are then connected through the ATM network using a Soft
Table 1-1 FRSM Card Types Supported by PXM1E Controllers
Front Card Back CardMaximum Connections
FRSM-8T1 RJ48-8T1, RJ48-8T1-R
1000
FRSM-8T1-C RJ48-8T1, RJ48-8T1-R
1000
FRSM-8E1 RJ48-8E1, SMB-8E1, RJ48-8E1-R, SMB-8E1-R
1000
FRSM-8E1-C RJ48-8E1, SMB-8E1, RJ48-8E1-R, SMB-8E1-R
1000
FRSM-HS2/B MGX-12IN1-4S 4000
MGX-SCSI2-2HSSI/B
2000
1-1d Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Chapter 1 IntroductionCommon FRSM Card Features
Permanent Virtual Circuit (SPVC) to a remote device. This release of the FRSM cards supports communications over the ATM network with communications ports on the following destination devices:
• FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8T1-C, and FRSM-8E1-C (Frame Relay on PXM1 and PXM1E)
• FRSM-HS1 and FRSM-HS2 (Frame Relay on PXM1)
• FRSM-HS2/B (Frame Relay on PXM1 and PXM1E)
• FRSM12 (Frame Relay on PXM45)
• FRSM-2T3E3 (Frame Relay on PXM1, except Foresight)
• AXSM, AXSM/B, and AXSM-E (ATM on PXM45)
• AUSM8 (ATM on PXM1 and PXM1E)
• PXM1 and PXM1E (ATM)
• RPM and RPM-PR (Ethernet in PXM1, PXM1E, and PXM45 switches)
The devices listed above can serve as the destination port on the ATM network and must be connected to another device, which is typically a router, that will forward the communications to the actual destination.
When the destination port is an ATM interface, a router with an ATM interface must be attached to receive the data, unpackage the ATM frames, and forward the original data out over another interface.
When the destination port is an RPM or RPM-PR interface, the RPM card unpackages the ATM frames and forwards data out the appropriate Ethernet interface.
All communications over the FRSM cards are two way, so remote devices can forward data to a FRSM card, and the FRSM card will assemble Frame Relay frames to forward to the attached router.
Common FRSM Card FeaturesThe primary difference between the different FRSM cards is physical medium used. Features that are common to all the FRSM cards include:
• Support for frame sizes from 5 to 4510 octets
• ANSI T1.618 compliant, using two-octet headers
• Interpreted CCITT-16 CRC provided at end of the frame (frame discard if in error)
• Support for ITU-T Q.933 Annex A, ANSI T1.617 Annex D, and LMI local management of semipermanent virtual circuits (both UNI and NNI portions)
• Enhanced LMI provides auto configuration of traffic management parameters for attached Cisco routers
• Each logical port can be configured independently to run one of the following:
– Frame Relay UNI
– Frame Relay NNI
– ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
– Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
1-2Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 1 IntroductionFRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C
• Each connection can be configured independently to use one of the following:
– Frame Relay to ATM network interworking (FRF.5)
– Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (FRF.8) transparent (no protocol ID translation)
– Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (FRF.8) translational (protocol ID translation)
The following sections describe the physical features of the FRSM cards.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-CThe FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C each provide eight T1 interfaces for full-duplex communications at up to 1.544 Mbps. The physical connector for each line is an RJ48 connector.
The FRSM-8T1 supports fractional and unchannelized T1 port selection on a per-T1 basis.
The FRSM-8T1-C allows full DS0 and n x DS0 channelization of the T1s for a maximum of 192 ports per card. Up to 192 fully channelized T1 lines (24 channels x 8 lines) can be operated simultaneously on this card.
Additional physical layer features include:
• B8ZS or AMI line coding
• ANSI T1.408 extended superframe format line framing
• Each interface configurable as a single port (FRSM-8T1) or up to 24 ports (FRSM-8T1-C) running at full line rate, at 56 kbps, or n x 64 kbps
• LOS, OOF, AIS, RAI alarms
• Transmitter loop-timed to receiver or synchronized to shelf
FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-CThe FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C each provide eight E1 interfaces for full-duplex communications at up to 2.044 Mbps. The physical connectors for each card can be either RJ48 connectors or SMB connectors.
The FRSM-8E1 supports fractional and unchannelized E1 port selection on a per-E1 basis.
The FRSM-8E1-C allows full DS0 and n x DS0 channelization of the E1s for a maximum of 248 ports per card. Up to 192 fully channelized E1 lines (31 channels x 8 lines) can be operated simultaneously on this card.
Additional physical layer features include:
• HDB3 or AMI line coding
• ITU G.704 16-frame multiframe line framing and clear channel E1
• Each interface configurable as a single port (FRSM-8E1) or up to 31 ports (FRSM-8E1-C) running at full line rate, at 56 kbps, or n x 64 kbps
• LOS, OOF, AIS, RAI alarms
• Transmitter loop-timed to receiver or synchronized to shelf
1-3Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 1 IntroductionFRSM-HS2/B
FRSM-HS2/BThe FRSM-HS2/B can be used with one of two back cards, each of which supports a different interface type and port count. The following subsections introduce the physical layer features of the FRSM-HS2/B when used with the different back cards.
FRSM-HS2/B with Eight X.21 or V.35 InterfacesWhen used with the MGX-12IN1-4S back card, the FRSM-HS2/B card provides 8 X.21 or V.35 interfaces, each of which can support a maximum throughput of 8 Mbps, adding up to a total card throughput of 64 Mbps.
Additional physical layer features include:
• Serial line rate selection from 48 Kbps to 8.192 Mbps in multiples of 1000
• DCE or DTE selection on a per-port basis
• Support for 4000 data-link connection identifiers (DLCIs) per card
• Support for per-VC queueing on ingress with closed-loop traffic management
• Support for two priority levels of egress port queues for data traffic
• DCE and DTE loopbacks
• For DTE interfaces, the clock frequency threshold percentage is configurable (1–5 percent) with a default value of 3 percent.
FRSM-HS2/B with Two HSSI InterfacesWhen used with the MGX-SCSI2-2HSSI/B back card, the FRSM-HS2/B card provides 2 HSSI interfaces, each of which can support a maximum throughput of 52 Mbps, adding up to a total card throughput of 104 Mbps.
Additional physical layer features include:
• Serial line rate selection from 48 Kbps to 52 Mbps in multiples of 1000
• DCE or DTE selection on a per-port basis
• Support for 2000 DLCIs per card
• Support for per-VC queueing on ingress with closed-loop traffic management
• Support for five classes of service (high-priority, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, ABR, UBR) for data traffic
• DCE and DTE loopbacks
• For DTE interfaces, the clock frequency threshold percentage is configurable (1–5 percent) with a default value of 3 percent.
The FRSM-HS2/B supports both DCE and DTE modes with line rates between 48 Kbps to 51.84 Mbps for HSSI interface and 48Kbps to 8.192 Mbps for v.35/x.21 interface.
1-4Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and CommanRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
C H A P T E R 2
Provisioning Communications LinksThis chapter describes how to bring up Frame Relay communications on the physical ports of the FRSM cards using the command-line interface (CLI).
Note FRSM cards, lines, and ports can also be configured using the CiscoView application. Refer to the CiscoView documentation for the directions.
Note The easiest way to add connections is by using the Cisco WAN Manager application. For full details on how to set up a connection through the Cisco WAN Manager GUI, refer to the Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide.
This chapter explains how to provision the link and connection types described in Table 2-1.
To eliminate redundancy and help experienced users complete configuration tasks quickly and efficiently, this chapter provides configuration quickstart procedures.
Table 2-1 Link and Connection Types Applicable to FRSM Cards
FRSM Link and Connection Type Description
Lines Lines establish physical layer connectivity between a FRSM port and the same port type (T1, for example) on another device.
Frame Relay ports Frame Relay ports establish Frame Relay communications over a line to Frame Relay customer premises equipment (CPE).
FRSM-to-FRSM SPVCs Soft permanent virtual circuits (SPVCs) are permanent connections that can be rerouted in the event of a link failure. A FRSM-to-FRSM SPVC establishes a connection between two FRSM ports. Such ports can be on the same card, on different cards in the same switch, or on different cards in different switches.
FRSM-to-Non-FRSM SPVCs A FRSM-to-non-FRSM SPVC establishes a connection between a FRSM port and a port on a non-FRSM card such as an AUSM, RPM, or AXSM card. Such ports can be on different cards in the same switch or on different cards in different switches.
2-1d Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksPreparing for Provisioning
The first time you configure a connection type, use the applicable quickstart procedure to get an overview of the tasks to be performed. Then, for more detailed instructions, consult the appropriate section(s) elsewhere in the document that are called out in the quickstart procedure. As you gain experience in configuring FRSM card connections, referring to a quickstart procedure may suffice for performing a particular configuration task.
Tip You can get information about most CLI commands by entering the command without parameters. Ordinarily, experienced users can configure FRSM card connections using just the quickstart procedures and the online help facilities.
Note For a detailed description of the commands used in this chapter, refer to Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference.”
Preparing for ProvisioningWhen a FRSM card is first installed, it must be initialized before you can start configuration. The FRSM cards support card redundancy, and the FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C cards support line redundancy and bulk distribution through SRM cards. Before you begin provisioning connections, you need to initialize the cards you plan to provision, and then you should configure the card and line redundancy options. Otherwise, you may have to change your configuration later to support these options.
For instructions on initializing cards and configuring card and line redundancy, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Quickstart Provisioning ProceduresThe following sections contain abbreviated procedures for provisioning the communications capabilities of FRSM cards installed in MGX 8850 and 8830 Release 3 switches. These procedures provide a high level overview and reminder for users already experienced in configuring MGX switches.
2-2Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksQuickstart Provisioning Procedures
FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Line Configuration QuickstartTo prepare FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B lines for communications with customer premises equipment (CPE), perform the following steps:
Frame Relay Port Configuration QuickstartFrame Relay ports connect an MGX 8850 switch to CPE Frame Relay devices (which, in most cases, are routers).
Note The equipment at both ends of a Frame Relay line must be configured with compatible settings in order for the link to be logically completed.
To configure a Frame Relay port on a FRSM card, perform the following steps:
Command Purpose
Step 1 username
<password>
Start a configuration session.
Note To perform the steps in this quickstart procedure, you must log in as a user with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 addln <line>addln <line> <interface_type>
Related commands:dsplnsdspln <line>delln <line>
Bring up a line. The interface_type parameter is required for FRSM-HS2/B lines.
This step establishes physical layer connectivity between an MGX switch and a Frame Relay device.
See the “Bringing Up Lines” section that appears later in this chapter.
Step 3 cnfln <options>
Related commands:dsplnsdspln <line>delln <line>
This optional step allows you to change a line configuration when the default or existing configuration needs changing.
See the “Configuring FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Lines” section that appears later in this chapter.
Command Purpose
Step 1 username
<password>
Start a configuration session.
Note To perform all the steps in this quickstart procedure, you must log in as a user with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 addln <line> Prepare a FRSM line for communications.
See “FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Line Configuration Quickstart,” which appears earlier in this chapter.
Step 3 addport <options>
Related commands:dspport <port>
dspports
Add a Frame Relay port.
This step establishes Frame Relay communications between two Frame Relay devices.
See the “Adding Frame Relay Ports” section that appears later in this chapter.
2-3Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksQuickstart Provisioning Procedures
FRSM-to-FRSM SPVC Configuration QuickstartA soft permanent virtual circuit (SPVC), a variant of a permanent virtual circuit (PVC), can be rerouted using the Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) Version 1.0 protocol.
Both PVCs and SPVCs are full-time connections. However, a PVC uses a predefined circuit path that fails altogether if that path is interrupted for any reason. Conversely, if a link along an SPVC path fails or that link cannot provide the required bandwidth to support the connection, the PNNI protocol reroutes that link to maintain the connection and to supply the necessary bandwidth.
To configure an SPVC between two FRSM card ports (on the same card in a switch, on different cards in the same switch, or on cards in different switches), perform the following steps:
FRSM-to-Non-FRSM SPVC Configuration QuickstartWhen creating an SPVC between a FRSM card and a non-FRSM card (such as an AUSM, RPM, or AXSM card), you must define both ends of the connection, just as you would for a FRSM-to-FRSM connection. The difference is that you will have to refer to the documentation for the non-FRSM product for information on configuring the connection endpoint.
Command Purpose
Step 1 username
<password>
Start a configuration session.
Note To perform all the steps in this quickstart procedure, you must log in as a user with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 Refer to the software configuration guides for the switches between the two FRSM cards to be connected. See the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3 and the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Configure the trunks that link the switch(es) that host(s) the FRSM card ports.
Verify PNNI connectivity between the nodes that host the SPVC endpoints.
Step 3 See the “Frame Relay Port Configuration Quickstart” section that appears earlier in this chapter.
Configure the Frame Relay port at each end of the SPVC you are creating.
Step 4 addcon <options>
Related commands:dspconsdspcon <port.DLCI>
Configure the slave side of the SPVC (if you are configuring a double-ended SPVC).
See the “Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards” section that appears later in this chapter.
Step 5 addcon <options>
Related commands:dspconsdspcon <port.DLCI>
Configure the master side of the SPVC.
Note In this release, the FRSM cards cannot host the master side of a single-ended SPVC.
See the “Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards” section that appears later in this chapter.
2-4Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
To configure an SPVC between a FRSM card and a non-FRSM card, perform the following steps:
General FRSM Provisioning ProceduresThis section describes the following procedures for configuring FRSM card communications:
• Bringing Up Lines
• Configuring FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B Lines
• Adding Frame Relay Ports
• Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards
Command Purpose
Step 1 username
<password>
Start a configuration session.
Note To perform all the steps in this quickstart procedure, you must log in as a user with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 Refer to the software configuration guides for the switches between the two FRSM cards to be connected. See the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3 and the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) and MGX 8950 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Configure the trunks that link the switch(es) that host(s) the FRSM card ports.
Verify PNNI connectivity between the nodes that host the SPVC endpoints.
Step 3 See the “Frame Relay Port Configuration Quickstart” section that appears earlier in this chapter.
Configure the Frame Relay port at the FRSM card end of the SPVC you are creating.
Step 4 addcon <options>
Related commands:dspconsdspcon <port.DLCI>
Configure the slave side of the SPVC (if you are configuring a double-ended SPVC).
If the slave side of the connection is on the FRSM card, see the “Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards” section that appears later in this chapter.
If the slave side of the connection is on a non-FRSM card, refer to the documentation for that card.
Step 5 addcon <options>
Related commands:dspconsdspcon <port.DLCI>
Configure the master side of the SPVC.
Note In this release, the FRSM cards cannot host the master side of a single-ended SPVC.
If the master side of the connection is on the FRSM card, see the “Configuring SPVCs on FRSM Cards” section that appears later in this chapter.
If the master side of the connection is on a non-FRSM card, refer to the documentation for that card.
2-5Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Bringing Up LinesInstalling a FRSM card can add up to 8 physical lines to your switch. You must bring up a line before you can configure it or provision Frame Relay services on the line.
Before a line is brought up, or after it is brought down, the switch does not monitor the line. Prior to bringing up a line, the FRSM port status light for the line is unlit, and all line alarms are cleared.
When you bring up a line on a FRSM card, the switch starts monitoring the line. The FRSM card port status light turns green when physical layer connectivity is established with a remote device. If a physical layer communications problem occurs, the port status light turns red, and an alarm is reported.
Tip To minimize the number of alarms reported and to reduce the frequency of failed port status lamps (which display red), it is recommended that you keep lines down until they are actually needed for communication.
To bring up a FRSM line on an MGX switch, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Establish a configuration session using a user name with GROUP 1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 Select the FRSM card on which you want to bring up a line by issuing the cc command, as shown below:
PXM1E_SJ.1.7.PXM.a > cc <slotnumber>
Replace the <slotnumber> parameter with the number of the slot in which the FRSM card is installed.
Step 3 To activate a line on the FRSM card, enter the addln command as shown below:
PXM1E_SJ.1.1.FRSM.a > addln <line> <interface_type>
Replace the <line> parameter with the number corresponding to the back card port to which the line is connected. Table 2-2 lists the valid line numbers for the FRSM cards.
The <interface_type> parameter only applies when you are using the FRSM-HS2/B card with the 12IN1-8S back card. For the 12IN1-8S back card, specify X.21 as the interface type. If you are using the SCSI2-2HSSI/B back card, the default value, V.35, applies.
Table 2-2 FRSM Card Types
Front Card Valid Line Numbers
FRSM-8T1 1 to 8
FRSM-8T1-C 1 to 8
FRSM-8E1 1 to 8
FRSM-8E1-C 1 to 8
FRSM-HS2/B 1 to 2 with HSSI 1 to 8 with 12IN1-8S
2-6Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Step 4 To display the current configuration for all lines on FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B cards, enter the dsplns command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.1.FRSM.a > dsplns
Line Conn Type Status/Coding Length XmtClock Alarm Stats Type Source Alarm ---- ----- ------------ ------ -------- ------------- -------- ----- ----- 1.1 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No 1.2 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No 1.3 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No 1.4 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 1.5 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 1.6 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 1.7 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 1.8 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
The dsplns command report can be different for different card types. When a line has been successfully brought up, the status column reports the line status as Enabled or Ena.
The alarm state indicates whether the line is communicating with a remote switch. When the alarm state is blank or is reported as No, it indicates that the physical devices at each end of the line have established physical layer communications. Higher-layer connectivity is established later when ports are configured on the FRSM card lines.
Configuring FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B LinesAll line types are brought up with a default configuration, which may or may not be compatible with the Frame Relay device to which you are connecting. When configuring a FRSM card line, you must ensure that the devices at both ends of the connection are using the same configuration parameters on the shared line.
To configure lines on a FRSM card, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Establish a configuration session using a user name with GROUP 1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 If you do not know the line number you want to configure on the FRSM card, enter the dsplns command to display the current configuration of all lines on the card:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dsplns
Remember that you cannot configure a line until you have brought it up, as described earlier in the “Bringing Up Lines” section.
2-7Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Step 3 To display the configuration information for the particular line that you want to configure, enter a dspln command in the format shown below:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dspln 2
LineNum: 2 LineConnectorType: RJ-48 LineType: dsx1ESF LineEnable: Enabled LineCoding: dsx1B8ZS LineLength: 0-131 ft LineXmtClockSource: LocalTiming LineLoopbackCommand: NoLoop LineSendCode: NoCode LineUsedTimeslotsBitMap: 0x400 LineLoopbackCodeDetection: codeDetectDisabled LineBertEnable: Disable
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
This sample dspln command shows the configuration parameters of a T1 line for a FRSM-8T1-C card that is installed in slot 25.
Step 4 To configure a line on a FRSM-8T1 or FRSM-8E1 card, enter a cnfln command in the format shown below:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > cnfln <line_num> <line_code> <line_len> <clk_src> [E1-signalling]
Table 2-3 lists and describes the parameters that you use in configuring T1 and E1 lines on a FRSM card.
Step 5 To configure a line on a FRSM-HS2/B card, enter a cnfln command in the format shown below:
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > cnfln <line_num> <line_type> <serial_line_rate> [-intrtyp interface_type] [-freqth dte_clk_thresh]
Table 2-3 lists and describes the parameters that you use in configuring FRSM-HS2/B lines on a FRSM card.
Table 2-3 Line Parameters for cnfln Command
Parameter Description
line_num Enter the number of the line you want to configure. Use the dsplns command to display the available lines.
line_code Select the line coding:
• B8ZS (T1) = 2
• HDB3 (E1) = 3
• AMI (T1/E1) = 4
2-8Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Step 6 To verify the line configuration changes made above, enter a dspln command for the appropriate line.
line_len Enter the length of the line:
• T1 range:
– 0 to 131 feet = 10
– 131 to 262 feet = 11
– 262 to 393 feet = 12
– 393 to 524 feet = 13
– 524 to 655 feet = 14
– >655 feet = 15
• E1 (with SMB line module) = 8
• E1 (with RJ48 line module) = 9
clk_src DSX1 clock source.
• 1 = loop clock
• 2 = local clock
E1-signalling This option selects E1 signalling methods. Enter the keyword for the signalling combination listed below:
• CAS, no CRC = CAS
• CAS with CRC = CAS_CRC
• CCS, no CRC = CCS
• CCS, with CRC = CCS_CRC
• Clear E1 = CLEAR
line_type Select the line type from the following:
• DTE = 1
• DCE = 2
• DTE_ST (V.35 only) = 3
serial_line_rate Specify a serial line rate from the following ranges:
• HSSI: 48000 to 51840000 bps
• V.35/X.21: 48000 to 10240000 bps
-intrtyp This option selects the interface type when the MGX-12IN1-4S back card is used. Select from the following options:
• X.21 = 2
• V.35 = 3 (default)
-freqth This option sets the DTE clock threshold. The range is 1 to 5 percent. The default value is 3 percent.
Table 2-3 Line Parameters for cnfln Command (continued)
Parameter Description
2-9Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Adding Frame Relay PortsThe “Bringing Up Lines” section that appears earlier in this chapter describes how to bring up physical lines by specifying the correct line port number. Line ports correspond to the line connectors on the back cards of an MGX 8850 switch.
Bringing up a line establishes physical layer connectivity between two network devices. When you add a Frame Relay port to a line, you enable Frame Relay communications by means of that line.
To add a Frame Relay port to a line, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Establish a configuration session using a user name with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 Determine the line number on which you intend to add the Frame Relay port. To do so, enter the dsplns command.
Step 3 Verify that the port number you want to use is not already in use. To display a list of the configured ports on the FRSM card, enter the following command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspports
Port Ena/Speed EQServ SignalType T391 T392 N391 N392 N393 Type Alarm ELMI Ratio -------- --- ----- ------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- -------- ----- ---- 30.1.1 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off 30.2.2 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off 30.7.7 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off 30.8.8 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel Yes Off
Number of ports: 4
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00ffffff PortNumNextAvailable: 3
This example shows the command display for a FRSM-8T1-C card. This command displays all the port numbers configured on the FRSM card in the Port column. The port numbers in the Port column appear in the format slot.line.port, so the port number is the number that appears after the last period. When you add a port, you must specify a unique port number. For example, if port number 2 is assigned to line 2, you cannot use port 2 on any other line on that FRSM card.
Note The FRSM-8T1-C and FRSM-8E1-C cards are the only cards that support multiple ports on the same line. You can add just one port per line for the FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B cards.
Step 4 To add a Frame Relay port to a FRSM-8T1 or FRSM-8E1 card, enter the following command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addport <port_num> <line_num> <ds0_speed> <begin_slot> <num_slot> <port_type>
Table 2-4 lists and describes the addport command parameters.
Step 5 To add a Frame Relay port to a FRSM-HS2/B card, enter the following command:
2-10Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addport <port_num> <line_num> <port_type>
Table 2-4 lists and describes the addport command parameters.
Table 2-4 Parameters for addport Command
Parameter or Option Description
port_num Port number for the Frame Relay service. The port number range varies with the card type:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–2 with HSSI back card
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–8 with 12IN1-8S back card
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line, so you might want to limit the port numbers to 1-8 for easier identification.
line_num Line number to which the port definition applies. The line number range varies with the card type:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–8
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–8
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–2 with HSSI back card
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–8 with 12IN1-8S back card
ds0_speed This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and sets the bit rate as either 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps for the DS0:
• 1 = 56 Kbps
• 2 = 64 Kbps
begin_slot This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and selects the starting time slot for port communications over the T1 or E1 frame. Valid slot numbers are:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–24
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–32
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line. Therefore, you should enter 1 for the starting slot so that you can use the full bandwidth of the line.
2-11Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
The following addport command example defines Frame Relay port 1 on T1 line 1 in slot 11. Because this is a nonchannelized card, slots 1 through 24 are assigned to this port.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > addport 1 1 1 1 24 1
The next addport command example defines Frame Relay port 1 on the channelized T1 line 1 in slot 30. Slots 1 through 4 are assigned to port 1.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addport 1 1 1 1 4 1
Step 6 To display the configuration information for a specific port, enter the following command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dspport <port>
Replace the <port> parameter with the number assigned to the port during configuration.
The following example shows the output of a dspport command for port number 2:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dspport 8
SlotNum: 25 PortLineNum: 8 PortNum: 8 PortRowStatus: Add PortDs0Speed: 56k PortDs0ConfigBitMap(1stDS0): 0xffffff(1) PortEqueueServiceRatio: 1 PortFlagsBetweenFrames: 1 PortSpeed: 1344kbps SignallingProtocolType: NoSignalling AsynchronousMsgs: UPD_UFS disabled T391LineIntegrityTimer: 10 T392PollingVerificationTimer: 15 N391FullStatusPollingCounter: 6 N392ErrorThreshold: 3 N393MonitoredEventCount: 4
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
num_slot This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and determines the number of consecutive time slots for this port within the T1 or E1 frame. Valid slot numbers are:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–24
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–32
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line. Therefore, you should enter the maximum slot number (either 24 or 32) so that you can use the full bandwidth of the line.
port_type Type of service as Frame Relay, FUNI, or frame forwarding.
• 1 = Frame Relay UNI or NNI
• 2 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 3 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
Table 2-4 Parameters for addport Command (continued)
Parameter or Option Description
2-12Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
EnhancedLmi: Off PortState: FailedDuetoLineFailure PortSignallingState: No Signalling Failure CLLMEnableStatus: Disable CLLMxmtStatusTimer: 0 portType: funi-mode-1a PortIngrPercentUtil: 0 PortEgrPercentUtil: 0 PortOversubscribed: False PortSvcStatus: Disable PortSvcInUse: Not In-Use PortSvcShareLcn: Card-based PortSvcLcnLow: 0 PortSvcLcnHigh: 0 PortSvcDlciLow: 0 PortSvcDlciHigh: 0
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00ffffff PortNumNextAvailable: 1
Tip To change the port configuration, enter the cnfport command. To delete the port configuration, enter the delport command. For more information about these commands, refer to Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference”.
Configuring SPVCs on FRSM CardsFRSM SPVCs are created between one Frame Relay port and another Frame Relay port. Each SPVC has two endpoints. The master endpoint is responsible for routing and rerouting functions. The slave endpoint is responsible for responding to requests from the master during connection setup and rerouting. Both endpoints are configured on the switch or switches to which the Frame Relay CPE connects. Such endpoints can be on the same switch or on different switches.
The master/slave relationship exists for each SPVC and applies only to that SPVC connection. For example, you can have one SPVC with a master on Node A and a slave on Node B, and then create another SPVC with the master on Node B and the slave on Node A. It is good practice to distribute the master side of SPVCs among network nodes so that route processing functions can be distributed.
You can create two types of SPVCs on a FRSM cards:
• Single-ended SPVCs
• Double-ended SPVCs
Single-ended SPVCs are defined at the master endpoint and do not require configuration of a slave endpoint. The primary benefit of single-ended SPVCs is that they are easier to configure. After configuration, the master endpoint configures and brings up the slave endpoint. In order for this feature to work correctly, the destination endpoint must support single-ended SPVCs.
2-13Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Note In this software release, the FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B cards support only the slave side of single-ended SPVCs. This means that you can configure master endpoints for single-ended SPVCs on other devices that support this feature, but you cannot create a single-ended SPVC by defining a master endpoint on a FRSM card. If both SPVC endpoints must terminate on FRSM cards, you must create a double-ended SPVC.
Double-ended SPVCs require separate configuration of the master and slave endpoints. The slave endpoint must be configured first because this step generates a slave address that must be entered during master endpoint configuration.
The following sections describe how to configure slave and master SPVC connections.
Configuring the Slave Side of SPVCs
If you wish to configure a double-ended SPVC connection, you must first configure the slave endpoint for the connection. If you are configuring a single-ended SPVC, you need not configure a slave endpoint.
To configure the slave side of a double-ended SPVC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Establish a configuration session using a user name with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Step 2 Define the slave side of the SPVC by entering the following addcon command:
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a > addcon <port_number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>] [-admin <ConnAdminStatus>]
Note If the addcon command fails and displays the “Failed to update disk” message, it could be that the PNNI controller has not been added on the PXM1E card. For information on adding the PNNI controller, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Table 2-5 lists and describes the parameters for the addcon command. The local and remote terms used in this table refer to settings for the local port you are configuring and the remote port at the other end of the connection. If you omit an option, a default value for that option is used for SPVC configuration.
Caution Once you create an SPVC connection, you cannot change the SPVC prefix until all SPVC connections have been deleted. The procedure for changing the SPVC prefix is described in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
2-14Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command
Parameter Description
port_number Port number in the range:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–8 (12IN1-8S back card)
DLCI Data-link connection identifier (DLCI) value.
Range: 16–1023
CIR Committed information rate (CIR) bps value:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C 0–1536000
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–2048000
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–51840000 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–8192000 (12IN1-8S back card)
-cntp Channel interworking type. Set this option to one of the following:
• 1 = Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking (NIW, FRF.5—default)
• 2 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• 3 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• 4 = FUNI (Frame Relay UNI)
• 5 = frame forwarding
-contp Controller type. Select one of the following:
• 1 = PAR
• 2 = PNNI (default)
• 3 = MPLS
-sertp Service class type. Select one of the following service types:
• 1 = high priority (CBR—default)
• 2 = rtVBR
• 3 = nrtVBR
• 5 = UBR
• 9 = stdABR
-master Mastership role of connection. Select from the following options:
• 1 = master
• 2 = slave (default)
-rmc Remote connection ID. This option is used when defining the master end of a connection. Enter the slave connection ID as it appears after the addcon command is issued. The format is: RemoteNsapAddress.VPI.VCI.
2-15Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
-pcr Local peak cell rate in cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-scr Local sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrpcr Peak cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrmcr Minimum cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-ingut Ingress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-ovrid Subscription override. To apply CAC, enter -ovrid 1. To ignore CAC, enter -ovrid 2. Default setting does not apply CAC.
-egrat Egress service rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 2400–1,536,000 bps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 2400–2,048,000 bps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 2400–52,000,000 bps
The default setting is equal to the CIR value entered.
-egut Egress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-bc Burst commit:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command (continued)
Parameter Description
2-16Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
-be Burst excess:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-detag Discard Eligible (DE) tagging. To enable DE tagging, enter -detag 1. To disable, enter -detag 2. The default setting disables DE tagging.
-demap DE to Cell Loss Priority (CLP) mapping. Set this option as follows:
• CLP=DE: -demap 1 (default)
• CLP=0: -demap 2
• CLP=1: -demap 3
-clpmap CLP to DE mapping. Set this option as follows:
• DE=CLP: -clpmap 1 (default)
• DE=0: -clpmap 2
• DE=1: -clpmap 3
• Ignore CLP: -clpmap 4
-iqdet Ingress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
-iqecn Ingress queue Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Range is 1 to 65535 bytes. Default setting is 6553.
-iqdep Ingress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 4510–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
-eqdet Egress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command (continued)
Parameter Description
2-17Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
-eqdep Egress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
-eqecn Egress queue ECN threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 6553.
-cos ATM connection service type. Select from the following:
• CBR1 = 21 (default)
• CBR2 = 31
• CBR3 = 32
• rtVBR1 = 22
• rtVBR2 = 23
• rtVBR3 = 24
• nrtVBR1 = 25
• nrtVBR2 = 26
• nrtVBR3 = 27
• UBR1 = 28
• UBR2 = 29
• stdABR = 30
-maxcost Maximum end-to-end cost for the connection. Range is 1 to 2,147,483,647. Default setting is 2147483647.
-type Trunk restriction option. To restrict the connection routing to terrestrial trunks, enter -type 2. To restrict the connection routing to satellite trunks, enter -type 3. To enable connection routing without trunk restrictions, enter -type 1. Default setting routes connections with no restrictions.
-rtngprio Routing priority for this connection. Range is 1 to 15. Default setting is 8.
-rpcr Remote peak cell rate in cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command (continued)
Parameter Description
2-18Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Tip If you omit one or more of the configuration options when entering the addcon command, the SPVC connection uses the default values listed in Table 2-5, as appropriate. To override the default value for a given option, enter the option with a desired value.
Note You can configure additional ABR parameters with the cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanabrrates, and cnfchanstdabr commands. You can view ABR parameters with the dspchanstdabr command. For more information about these commands, refer to Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference.”
The following addcon command defines a port as the slave side of an SPVC connection. Note the slave Local Connection ID shown at the end of the display.
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a > addcon 1 16 4000
Local Connection ID is : 47009181000000000052190a4e000001075b0100.11.35
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a >
Step 3 Write down the NSAP address displayed when the addcon command output is completed. You will need the NSAP address to configure the master side of the SPVC connection.
-rscr Remote sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rmcr Remote minimum cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rcbs Remote maximum burst size. Range is 1 to 5,000,000.
-admin Connection administration status. This option applies only to FRSM-HS2/B.
To define the new connection as administratively up, enter -admin 1 or just omit this option. To define a new connection that is administratively down, enter -admin 2.
Table 2-5 Parameters for the addcon Command (continued)
Parameter Description
2-19Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Tip When you set up the master side of the SPVC, you will need to enter the slave ATM address reported by the addcon command. If you maintain the current session or use the session Copy command to copy the ATM address now, you can use the session Paste command to complete the addcon command on the switch that hosts the master side of the SPVC.
Step 4 Verify the addition of the slave side of the SPVC connection by entering the following command, which causes all information for the SPVCs to be displayed:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcons
LCN Port.DLCI VPI.VCI Class Type M/S CIR DE EgrQ Admin Alarm ---- --------- ------- ------ ----- --- -------- --- ---- ----- ----- 0016 001.0100 30.0119 CBR NIW S 4800 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0017 001.0103 30.0122 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0018 001.1023 30.1042 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0019 001.0032 30.0051 CBR NIW M 32000 Dis Hi Up OK
Number of channels: 4
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Step 5 If you add the master side of the SPVC at a later date, you can display the slave connection ID with the dspcon command as shown in the following example. The connection number is specified by entering the port number and DLCI number in the format port.DLCI. The complete slave ID must be entered at the master endpoint in the format ChanLocalNSAP.ChanLocalVpi.ChanLocalVci. These values correspond to dspcon parameters shown in this example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon 1.100
------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 20 RowStatus: Mod AdmnState: Up ChanState: Failed ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- PORT-ALARM CTRLR-ABIT E-AIS/RDI LMI-ABIT RAS FAIL ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO YES NO NO NO ------------------------------------------------------
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
ChanNum: 20 ChanRowStatus: Mod ConnAdminStatus: Up ChanPortNum: 1 ChanDLCI: 100 EgressQSelect: Hi ChanServType: CBR IngressQDepth: 65535 IngressQDEThresh: 32767 IngressQECNThresh: 6553 EgressQDepth: 65535 EgressQDEThresh: 32767 EgressQECNThresh: 6553 DETaggingEnable: Disabled CIR: 48000 Bc: 5100 Be: 5100 IBS: 100
2-20Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
ICR: 0 MCR: 0 PCR: 0 RIF: 64 RDF: 16
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 Cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16 ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState: Disabled ChanTestType: TestOff ChanTestState: NotInProgress ChanRTDresult: 65535 ms ChanType: NIW ChanFECNmap: setEFCIzero ChanDEtoCLPmap: mapCLP ChanCLPtoDEmap: mapDE ChanFrConnType: SPVC ChanIngrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrSrvRate: 48000 ChanOvrSubOvrRide: Do not apply CAC ChanLocalVpi: 30 ChanLocalVci: 119 ChanLocalNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30100 ChanRemoteVpi: 0 ChanRemoteVci: 0 ChanRemoteNSAP: NULL NSAP ChanMastership: Slave ChanVpcFlag: Vcc ChanConnServiceType: CBR1 ChanRoutingPriority: 8 ChanMaxCost: 2147483647 ChanRestrictTrunkType: No Restriction ChanConnPCR: 180 ChanConnSCR: 180 ChanConnMCR: 10 ChanConnPercentUtil: 100 ChanConnRemotePCR: 180 cps ChanConnRemoteSCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemoteMCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemotePercentUtil:100 ChanServiceTypeOverride: disabled ChanServiceRate: 2000 xps ChanZeroCirEir: 0 bps ChanReRoute: False RemoteConnMBS: 1024 cells
ChanNumNextAvailable: 22
Configuring the Master Side of SPVCs
To configure the master side of an SPVC, perform the following steps:
2-21Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Step 1 Establish a configuration session using a user name with GROUP1 privileges or higher.
Tip During this procedure, you will have to enter the ATM address for the slave end of the connection. If you establish this session from the same workstation you used to create the slave connection, you can do a copy and paste sequence to avoid data entry errors.
Step 2 To define the master side of the SPVC connection, enter the following command:
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a > addcon <port_number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-rmc <RemoteConnId>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>] [-admin <ConnAdminStatus>]
Note If the addcon command fails and displays the “Failed to update disk” message, it could be that the PNNI controller has not been added on the PXM1E card. For information on adding the PNNI controller, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Table 2-5 lists and describes the parameters for the addcon command.
Tip If you omit one or more of the options when entering the addcon command, the connection uses the default values listed in Table 2-5. To override the default value for a given option, enter the option with the desired value.
The following addcon command defines a port as the master side of a double-ended SPVC.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addcon 7 111 32000 -master 1 -rmc 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30200.30.129
Step 3 To view the master-side of the new SPVC connection in the connection list, enter the dspcons command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcons
LCN Port.DLCI VPI.VCI Class Type M/S CIR DE EgrQ Admin Alarm ---- --------- ------- ------ ----- --- -------- --- ---- ----- ----- 0020 001.0100 30.0119 CBR NIW S 48000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0021 001.0101 30.0120 CBR NIW M 48000 Dis Hi Down ADMIN-DOWN 0022 002.0110 30.0129 CBR NIW S 32000 Dis Hi Up OK 0023 007.0111 30.0130 CBR NIW M 32000 Dis Hi Up OK
Number of channels: 4
ChanNumNextAvailable: 24
This command displays all the connections for the FRSM card.
2-22Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
Step 4 To display the configuration information for a specific SPVC endpoint, enter the following command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon port.DLCI
Replace the port.DLCI parameter with the port number and DLCI number for the connection you want to display. These numbers are listed in the dspcons command display.
2-23Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
The following is sample output from the dspcon command for the connection created in the previous example. Notice that this report shows the NSAP IDs for both ends of the connection.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon 7.111
------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 23 RowStatus: Add AdmnState: Up ChanState: Ok ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- PORT-ALARM CTRLR-ABIT E-AIS/RDI LMI-ABIT RAS FAIL ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO NO NO NO NO ------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 23 ChanRowStatus: Add ConnAdminStatus: Up ChanPortNum: 7 ChanDLCI: 111 EgressQSelect: Hi ChanServType: CBR IngressQDepth: 65535 IngressQDEThresh: 32767 IngressQECNThresh: 6553 EgressQDepth: 65535 EgressQDEThresh: 32767 EgressQECNThresh: 6553 DETaggingEnable: Disabled CIR: 32000 Bc: 5100 Be: 5100 IBS: 100 ICR: 0 MCR: 0 PCR: 0 RIF: 64 RDF: 16 Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 Cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16 ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState: Disabled ChanTestType: TestOff ChanTestState: NotInProgress ChanRTDresult: 65535 ms ChanType: NIW ChanFECNmap: setEFCIzero ChanDEtoCLPmap: mapCLP ChanCLPtoDEmap: mapDE ChanFrConnType: SPVC ChanIngrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrSrvRate: 32000 ChanOvrSubOvrRide: Do not apply CAC ChanLocalVpi: 30 ChanLocalVci: 130 ChanLocalNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30700 ChanRemoteVpi: 30 ChanRemoteVci: 129 ChanRemoteNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30200
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
2-24Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
ChanMastership: Master ChanVpcFlag: Vcc ChanConnServiceType: CBR1 ChanRoutingPriority: 8 ChanMaxCost: 2147483647 ChanRestrictTrunkType: No Restriction ChanConnPCR: 120 ChanConnSCR: 120 ChanConnMCR: 10 ChanConnPercentUtil: 100 ChanConnRemotePCR: 120 cps ChanConnRemoteSCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemoteMCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemotePercentUtil:100 ChanServiceTypeOverride: disabled ChanServiceRate: 1334 xps ChanZeroCirEir: 0 bps ChanReRoute: False RemoteConnMBS: 1024 cells
ChanNumNextAvailable: 24
2-25Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 2 Provisioning Communications LinksGeneral FRSM Provisioning Procedures
2-26Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and CommanRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
C H A P T E R 3
FRSM Card ManagementThis chapter provides procedures for managing FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-HS2/B cards after the initial card setup and provisioning.
Note Initial card setup is described in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3. The provisioning of FRSM cards is described in Chapter 2, “Provisioning Communications Links.”
This chapter describes the following FRSM management procedures:
• Managing CLI Sessions
• Managing Cards
• Managing Lines
• Managing Ports
• Managing Resource Partitions
• Managing Connections
Managing CLI SessionsBasic session initialization and management is described in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3. Table 3-1 lists and describes the session management commands supported on the FRSM cards. For more information on these commands, see Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference.”
Table 3-1 Session Management Commands
Command Description
? Displays the available commands.
clearclrscrncls
Clears the session screen.
myid Displays the user ID that was used to start the current session.
3-1d Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Cards
Managing CardsBasic card initialization and configuration is described in the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3. The following sections provide procedures for doing the following:
• Distinguishing Between Channelized and Nonchannelized FRSM Cards
• Displaying General Card Information
• Displaying Software Version and Status Information
Note This section provides procedures for some of the most common card management commands. For a complete list of card management commands, refer to Table 4-2 in Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference.”
Distinguishing Between Channelized and Nonchannelized FRSM CardsThe FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards are available in channelized and nonchannelized versions. The nonchannelized versions are labeled FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 on the front of the cards, and the channelized versions are labeled FRSM-8T1-C and FRSM-8E1-C. However, the CLI prompt and the dspcds and dspcd command output do not differentiate between the channelized and nonchannelized versions. To determine if a FRSM-8T1 or FRSM-8E1 is a nonchannelized or channelized version using the CLI, enter the dspfeature command as shown in the following example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspfeature
Channelized: On Rate Control: On
The example above is for a channelized FRSM card. To determine whether the card is a FRSM-8T1 or FRSM-8E1 card, use the dspcd or dspcds command.
setcmdc Enables or disables the command completion feature, which automatically completes an incomplete command if the command portion entered uniquely identifies a supported command.
setpagemode Enables or disables the page feature, which breaks command displays into pages for easier viewing.
Table 3-1 Session Management Commands (continued)
Command Description
3-2Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Cards
Displaying General Card InformationTo display general information about a FRSM card, use the dspcd command as shown in the following example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dspcd
ModuleSlotNumber: 11 FunctionModuleState: Active FunctionModuleType: FRSM-HS2B-12IN1 FunctionModuleSerialNum: SAG05274SFR FunctionModuleHWRev: ex FunctionModuleFWRev: 020.000.001.046-A FunctionModuleResetReason: Reset by PXM LineModuleType: LM-12in1-8s LineModuleState: Present mibVersionNumber: 80 configChangeTypeBitMap: CardCnfChng, LineCnfChng cardIntegratedAlarm: Major cardMajorAlarmBitMap: Line Alarm cardMinorAlarmBitMap: Channel failure
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Front Card Info
pcb part no-(800 level): 800-17066-01 pcb part no-(73 level): 73-06948-01 pcb revision (800 level): 02 fab par no-(28 level): 28-05059-01 pcb serial no: SAG05274SFR clei code: 0 manufacturing eng: 0x0 rma test history1: 0x0 rma test history2: 0x0 rma history: 0x0 platform features: 0x1 self test result: 0x0 Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Back Card Info
pcb part no-(800 level): 800-12345-01 pcb part no-(73 level): 73-01234-01 pcb revision (800 level): 02 fab par no-(28 level): 28-01234-01 pcb serial no: 123456 clei code: 00 manufacturing eng: 0x0 rma test history1: 0x0 rma test history2: 0x0 rma history: 0x0 PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
Note that the dspcd command displays information on card alarms.
3-3Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Lines
Displaying Software Version and Status InformationTo display information on the software running on a FRSM card, use the chkflash and version commands.
The chkflash command shows the status of the boot software:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > chkflashProgram length = 300145Calculated checksum = 147bc308 stored checksum = 147bc308Flash checksum passed
The version command displays the software versions running on the card:
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > version***** Cisco System. FRSM-VHS Card ***** Firmware Version = 020.000.001.046-A Backup Boot version = VHS_BT_1.0.04_19Jul0VxWorks (for CISCO) version 5.3.1.Kernel: WIND version 2.5.Made on Mon Apr 29 02:03:54 PDT 2002.Boot line:sl(0,0)helium: e=192.9.227.1 b=192.9.227.1 h=192.9.225.10 g=192.9.227.2 u=frvhs pw=frvhs1 tn=vhs1card1
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
Managing LinesChapter 2, “Provisioning Communications Links,” describes how to bring up (add) and modify FRSM card lines. The following sections provide procedures for doing the following:
• Displaying a List of Lines
• Displaying the Configuration for a Single Line
• Bringing Down a Line
• Managing Line Alarms
Note This section provides procedures for some of the most common line management commands. For a complete list of line management commands, refer to Table 4-3 in Chapter 4, “FRSM Command Reference.”
3-4Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Lines
Displaying a List of LinesTo display a list of lines on the current FRSM card, enter the dsplns command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dsplns
Line Conn Type Status/Coding Length XmtClock Alarm Stats Type Source Alarm ---- ----- ------------ ------ -------- ------------- -------- ----- ----- 25.1 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Mod/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No 25.2 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim No No 25.3 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.4 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.5 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.6 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.7 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.8 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
Displaying the Configuration for a Single LineTo display the configuration of a single line, enter the dspln command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspln <line>
Enter the line number with the command. You can view the available line numbers in the dsplns display. The following example shows the information you can display with the dspln command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dspln 2
LineNum: 2 LineConnectorType: RJ-48 LineType: dsx1ESF LineEnable: Enabled LineCoding: dsx1B8ZS LineLength: 0-131 ft LineXmtClockSource: LocalTiming LineLoopbackCommand: NoLoop LineSendCode: NoCode LineUsedTimeslotsBitMap: 0x400 LineLoopbackCodeDetection: codeDetectDisabled LineBertEnable: Disable
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
Bringing Down a LineWhen a line is not working properly, it generates a line alarm. If you want to suppress the alarm and you do not have time to correct the problem, you can bring down the line. Bringing down the line takes it out of service, so no alarms are generated.
3-5Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Lines
Tip You can reduce the level of an alarm on a failed line from major to minor by using the addlnloop command to place the line in local loopback mode. This does not completely eliminate the alarm, but it does reduce the severity and allow you to preserve the configured resources for that line.
To bring down a line, use the following procedure.
Step 1 Delete all connections that are associated with the line (dspcons and delcon commands).
Tip Connections and resource partitions are associated with ports in the respective display commands (dspcons and dsprscprtn), and ports are associated with lines (dspports). To determine which connections and resource partitions use a line, first determine which ports are configured for that line.
Step 2 Delete all resource partitions that are associated with the line (delrscprtn command).
Step 3 Delete all ports that are associated with the line (delport command).
Step 4 Enter the delln command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delln <line>
Enter the line number with the command. You can view the available line numbers in the dsplns display. The following example shows how to use the delln command:
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > delln 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
Managing Line AlarmsThe switch generates line alarms when problems occur. Use the following commands to display these alarms and alarm configuration parameters:
• dspalm
• dspalmcnf
• dspalmcnt
• dspalms
Use the following commands to clear alarms and alarm counts on lines:
• clralm
• clralmcnt
• clralmcnts
• clralms
3-6Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Ports
Managing PortsChapter 2, “Provisioning Communications Links,” describes how to add logical ports to the lines on FRSM cards. The following sections provide procedures for doing the following:
• Displaying a List of Ports
• Displaying the Status of a Single Port
• Deleting Ports
Displaying a List of PortsTo display a list of ports on the current FRSM card, enter the dspports command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspports
Port Ena/Speed EQServ SignalType T391 T392 N391 N392 N393 Type Alarm ELMI Ratio -------- --- ----- ------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- -------- ----- ---- 30.3.3 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off 30.4.4 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off
Number of ports: 2
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00000000 PortNumNextAvailable: 1
To determine if a port is in alarm, check the status in the Alarm column. For more information on a single port, use the dspport command.
Displaying the Status of a Single PortTo display the configuration and status of a single port, enter the dspport command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspport <port>
Enter the port number with the command. You can view the port numbers in the dspports display. The following example shows the dspport display for port 3.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspport 3
SlotNum: 30 PortLineNum: 3 PortNum: 3 PortRowStatus: Add PortDs0Speed: 64k PortDs0ConfigBitMap(1stDS0): 0xffffff(1) PortEqueueServiceRatio: 1 PortFlagsBetweenFrames: 1 PortSpeed: 1536kbps SignallingProtocolType: NoSignalling
3-7Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Resource Partitions
AsynchronousMsgs: UPD_UFS disabled T391LineIntegrityTimer: 10 T392PollingVerificationTimer: 15 N391FullStatusPollingCounter: 6 N392ErrorThreshold: 3 N393MonitoredEventCount: 4 EnhancedLmi: Off PortState: Active PortSignallingState: No Signalling Failure CLLMEnableStatus: Disable CLLMxmtStatusTimer: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
portType: frameRelay PortIngrPercentUtil: 0 PortEgrPercentUtil: 0 PortOversubscribed: False PortSvcStatus: Disable PortSvcInUse: Not In-Use PortSvcShareLcn: Card-based PortSvcLcnLow: 0 PortSvcLcnHigh: 0 PortSvcDlciLow: 0 PortSvcDlciHigh: 0
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00000000 PortNumNextAvailable: 1
Deleting PortsTo delete a FRSM port, enter the delport command, as shown below.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delport <port>
Replace the port parameter with the port number you want to delete. Port numbers are listed in the dspports command display.
Managing Resource PartitionsResource partitions define how port resources are distributed between two or more controllers. This software release supports only the PNNI controller, so all port resources are assigned to PNNI when a port is added. This resource assignment is automatically made by the software and results in the creation of a resource partition for the port.
During normal operation, you will not need to add a resource partition. You can view the resource partition configuration, make changes to it, or delete it. If you delete a resource partition, you will have to create a new partition for that port before you can assign connections to the port.
The following sections describe how to view, add, modify, and delete resource partitions.
3-8Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Resource Partitions
Displaying a Resource Partition ConfigurationTo display the resource partition configuration for a port, enter the dsprscprtn command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dsprscprtn <port>
Replace the port parameter with the port number. For example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dsprscprtn 3
Port User Status NumOfLcnAvail DlciLow DlciHigh IngrBW EgrBW CtrlrId ---- ------ ------ -------------- ------- -------- ------ ----- ------- 3 PNNI Add 1000 0 1023 100 100 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Adding a Resource PartitionTo add a resource partition to a port, enter the addrscprtn command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addrscprtn <port_num> <cntrlr_type> <pct_bw_ingr> <pct_bw_egr> <min_dlci> <max_dlci> <max_lcn> <cntrlr_id>
Table 3-2 lists and describes the parameters for the addrscprtn command.
The following example adds a resource partition to a port after the default partition was deleted.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addrscprtn 6 2 100 100 16 1023 1000 2
Table 3-2 Parameters for the addrscprtn Command
Parameter Description
port_num Port number to be partitioned. You must add a port to a line before you can define a partition for a port. Use the dspports command to view the available ports.
cntrlr_type Controller for this partition. Enter 2 as the PNNI controller is the only controller type supported in this release.
• PAR = 1
• PNNI = 2
• MPLS = 3
pct_bw_ingr Ingress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for ingress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
pct_bw_egr Egress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for egress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
min_dlci Minimum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_dlci Maximum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_lcn Maximum LCN to be used on this port. Range is 1 to 1000.
cntrlr_id Enter a number that will be associated with the controller used by this partition. Range is 1 to 255.
3-9Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Resource Partitions
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Modifying a Resource PartitionTo modify a resource partition for a port, enter the cnfrscprtn command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfrscprtn <port_num> <cntrlr_type> <pct_bw_ingr> <pct_bw_egr> <min_dlci> <max_dlci> <max_lcn> <cntrlr_id>
Table 3-3 lists and describes the parameters for the cnfrscprtn command.
The following example changes the default lower DLCI value to 16 and leaves all other resource partition values set to the default values.
PXM1E_SJ1.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfrscprtn 6 2 100 100 16 1023 1000 2
PXM1E_SJ1.1.30.FRSM.a >
Deleting a Resource ConfigurationTo delete the resource partition configuration for a port, enter the delrscprtn command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delrscprtn <port>
Replace the port parameter with the port number. For example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delrscprtn 6 2 2
Table 3-3 Parameters for the cnfrscprtn Command
Parameter Description
port_num Port number to be modified. Use the dspports command to view the available ports.
cntrlr_type Controller for this partition. Enter 2 as the PNNI controller is the only controller type supported in this release.
• PAR = 1
• PNNI = 2
• MPLS = 3
pct_bw_ingr Ingress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for ingress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
pct_bw_egr Egress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for egress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
min_dlci Minimum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_dlci Maximum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_lcn Maximum LCN to be used on this port. Range is 1 to 1000.
cntrlr_id Enter a number that will be associated with the controller used by this partition. Range is 1 to 255.
3-10Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Managing ConnectionsChapter 2, “Provisioning Communications Links,” describes how to add connections to FRSM cards. The following sections provide procedures for doing the following:
• Displaying a List of Connections
• Displaying the Status of a Single Connection
• Deleting Connections
Displaying a List of ConnectionsTo display a list of connections on the current FRSM card, enter the dspcons command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcons
LCN Port.DLCI VPI.VCI Class Type M/S CIR DE EgrQ Admin Alarm ---- --------- ------- ------ ----- --- -------- --- ---- ----- ----- 0016 001.0100 30.0119 CBR NIW S 4800 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0017 001.0103 30.0122 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0018 001.1023 30.1042 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0019 001.0032 30.0051 CBR NIW M 32000 Dis Hi Up OK
Number of channels: 4
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
To determine if a connection is in alarm, check the status in the Alarm column. For more information on a single port, use the dspcon command.
Displaying the Status of a Single ConnectionTo display the configuration and status of a single connection, enter the dspcon command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon <port.DLCI>
Enter the port number and DLCI number with the command. You can view the port and DLCI numbers in the dspcons display. For example:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon 1.100
------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 20 RowStatus: Mod AdmnState: Up ChanState: Failed ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- PORT-ALARM CTRLR-ABIT E-AIS/RDI LMI-ABIT RAS FAIL ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO YES NO NO NO ------------------------------------------------------
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
3-11Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
ChanNum: 20 ChanRowStatus: Mod ConnAdminStatus: Up ChanPortNum: 1 ChanDLCI: 100 EgressQSelect: Hi ChanServType: CBR IngressQDepth: 65535 IngressQDEThresh: 32767 IngressQECNThresh: 6553 EgressQDepth: 65535 EgressQDEThresh: 32767 EgressQECNThresh: 6553 DETaggingEnable: Disabled CIR: 48000 Bc: 5100 Be: 5100 IBS: 100 ICR: 0 MCR: 0 PCR: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
RIF: 64 RDF: 16 Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 Cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16 ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState: Disabled ChanTestType: TestOff ChanTestState: NotInProgress ChanRTDresult: 65535 ms ChanType: NIW ChanFECNmap: setEFCIzero ChanDEtoCLPmap: mapCLP ChanCLPtoDEmap: mapDE ChanFrConnType: SPVC ChanIngrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrSrvRate: 48000 ChanOvrSubOvrRide: Do not apply CAC ChanLocalVpi: 30 ChanLocalVci: 119 ChanLocalNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30100 ChanRemoteVpi: 0 ChanRemoteVci: 0 ChanRemoteNSAP: NULL NSAP ChanMastership: Slave ChanVpcFlag: Vcc ChanConnServiceType: CBR1 ChanRoutingPriority: 8 ChanMaxCost: 2147483647 ChanRestrictTrunkType: No Restriction ChanConnPCR: 180 ChanConnSCR: 180 ChanConnMCR: 10 ChanConnPercentUtil: 100
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
3-12Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
ChanConnRemotePCR: 180 cps ChanConnRemoteSCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemoteMCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemotePercentUtil:100 ChanServiceTypeOverride: disabled ChanServiceRate: 2000 xps ChanZeroCirEir: 0 bps ChanReRoute: False RemoteConnMBS: 1024 cells
ChanNumNextAvailable: 22
Deleting ConnectionsEach connection (or SPVC) has two endpoints. To completely delete a connection, you need to delete both endpoints. To delete a FRSM connection endpoint, enter the delcon command, as shown below.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delcon <port.DLCI>
Replace the port.DLCI parameter with the port number and DLCI number for the connection you want to display. These numbers are listed in the dspcons command display.
The delcon command deletes the SPVC connection endpoint on the local switch. Note, however, that this command does not delete the remote end of the SPVC. The remote end of the SPVC must be deleted by issuing a delcon command on that switch.
Testing a ConnectionThere are several commands that you can use to test a connection. The tstcon and tstdelay commands perform short tests that verify that the switch can communicate with both ends of the connection. The cnftrafficgen command performs a continuous test that can be used to detect intermittent errors.
Testing with tstcon
The tstcon command checks to see if the switch can communicate with both ends of the connection. To test a FRSM connection with the tstcon command, enter the command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > tstcon <port.DLCI>
Replace the port.DLCI parameter with the port number and DLCI number for the connection you want to test. These numbers are listed in the dspcons command display. The following is an example of a tstcon test:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > tstcon 1.32
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > TestCon in progress.
TestCon Passed.
3-13Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
Testing with tstdelay
The tstdelay command checks to see if the switch can communicate with both ends of the connection, and it returns a measurement of the delay across the connection. To test a FRSM connection with the tstdelay command, enter the command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > tstdelay <port.DLCI>
Replace the port.DLCI parameter with the port number and DLCI number for the connection you want to test. These numbers are listed in the dspcons command display. The following is an example of a tstdelay test:
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > tstdelay 18
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > TestDelay in progress.
TestDelay Passed with 1 ms.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Testing with cnftrafficgen
The cnftrafficgen command sends a test pattern between two connection endpoints and checks to see if the pattern sent is returned correctly. Unlike the tstcon and tstdelay tests, this test continues until you stop it.
To start, stop, or abort a FRSM connection test with the cnftrafficgen command, enter the command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnftrafficgen <channel> <action> <num_frames> <pattern_type >
Table 3-4 lists and describes the parameters for the cnftrafficgen command.
Table 3-4 Parameters for the cnftrafficgen Command
Parameter Description
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
action One of the following actions:
• 1 = start
• 2 = stop
• 3 = abort
num_frames Number of frames.
Range: 1—40960000
pattern_type Pattern types.
• All zeros = 1
• All ones = 2
• All fives = 3
• All As = 4
3-14Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
The following example starts a traffic generation test on channel 16 using 50 frames and an all-ones pattern.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnftrafficgen 16 1 50 1
Wait for the prompt......Starting Test
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
To display the test progress, enter the dsptrafficgen command as follows:
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dsptrafficgen [1]
The [1] option displays test statistics. The following example shows the test status without statistics:
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dsptrafficgen
Pvc Under Test : 168830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
The next example shows the test status with statistics.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dsptrafficgen 1
Pvc Under Test : 16Pattern type : 1( All 0's )Total Test Frames To Send : 50Total Test Frames Transmitted : 50Total Test Frames Received : 0
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
3-15Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 3 FRSM Card ManagementManaging Connections
3-16Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and CommanRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
C H A P T E R 4
FRSM Command ReferenceThe preferred tools to configure, monitor, and control an MGX 8830 or MGX 8850 switch are the CiscoView and Cisco WAN Manager applications. The command-line interface (CLI) also provides access to the MGX 8830 or MGX 8850 switches and is highly applicable during initial installation, troubleshooting, and any situation in which low-level control is useful.
The commands in the tables that follow (Table 4-1 to Table 4-6) are divided by major functional group. Each table shows the complete name of the command and the cards for which the command is valid. Examples of usage for the more common commands appear in the configuration chapters of this manual.
For information about navigating the command-line interface, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Tip If you are viewing this material in a book- or chapter-length PDF file, you can click on any command in the following tables to link to the description for that command. You can also click on commands listed in the “Related Commands” sections to link to command descriptions.
Table 4-1 FRSM Session Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
? X X X
clear X X X
clrscrn X X X
cls X X X
myid X X X
setcmdc X X X
setpagemode X X X
Table 4-2 FRSM Card Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
chkflash X X X
clrcderrs X X X
clrmsgcnt X X X
4-1d Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference
clrslftst X X X
clrtaskinfo X X X
cnfegrservtype X
cnfslftst X X X
cnfstdabrctrl X X
cnfunit391 X X
dspbufoverflow X X X
dspcd X X X
dspcderrs X X X
dspegrservtype X
dspfeature X X X
dspmsgcnt X X X
dspslftst X X X
dspslftsttbl X X X
dspstatparms X X X
dspstdabrctrl X X
dsptaskinfo X X X
dsptotals X X X
dspunit391 X X
I X X X
memShow X X X
runslftstno X X X
version X X X
Table 4-3 FRSM Line Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
addln X X X
addlnloop X X X
clralm X X
clralmcnt X X
clralmcnts X X
clralms X X
cnfclktype X
cnfln X X X
cnflnloop X X
Table 4-2 FRSM Card Management Commands (continued)
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
4-2Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference
cnfoamlpbk X X X
delln X X X
dellnloop X X X
dspalm X X X
dspalmcnf X X X
dspalmcnt X X X
dspalms X X X
dspln X X X
dsplns X X X
dspoamlpbk X X X
dsptotals X X X
Table 4-4 FRSM Port Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
addport X X X
clrportcnt X X X
clrportcnts X X X
cnfegrq X
cnfm32eqthresh X X
cnfport X X X
cnfportcllm X X X
copyports X X
delport X X X
delports X X
dspegrq X
dspegrqs X
dspm32eqthresh X X
dspport X X X
dspportcnt X X X
dspports X X X
dspportstats X X
dsptotals X X X
Table 4-3 FRSM Line Management Commands (continued)
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
4-3Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference
Table 4-5 FRSM Resource Partition Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
addrscprtn X X X
cnfrscprtn X X X
delrscprtn X X X
dsprscprtn X X X
Table 4-6 FRSM Connection Management Commands
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
addchanloop X X X
addcon X X X
addspvc X X X
clrchancnt X X X
clrchancnts X X X
clrsarcnt X X X
clrsarcnts X X X
cnfchan X X
cnfchanabrparams X X X
cnfchanabrrates X X X
cnfchancacoff X X X
cnfchanegressq X X X
cnfchaneir X X X
cnfchaningressq X X X
cnfchanmap X X X
cnfchanpol X X X
cnfchansrvrate X X X
cnfchanstdabr X X X
cnfcon X X X
cnftrafficgen X X X
copychans X X X
cpstobps X X X
delchan X X X
delchanloop X X X
delchans X X X
delcon X X X
dncon X X X
dspchan X X X
4-4Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference
dspchancnt X X X
dspchanmap X X X
dspchans X X X
dspchanstdabr X X X
dspchstats X X
dspcon X X X
dspcons X X X
dsplcn X X X
dspmaptbl X X X
dspsarcnt X X X
dspsarcnts X X X
dspservrate X X X
dsptotals X X X
dsptrafficgen X X X
queDsp X X
rrtcon X X X
tstcon X X X
tstdelay X X X
upcon X X X
Table 4-6 FRSM Connection Management Commands (continued)
Command FRSM-8T1/E1 FRSM-8T1-C/8E1-C FRSM-HS2/B
4-5Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Reference?
?Help—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the ? command to display a list of the commands supported on the FRSM card.
Syntax
?
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Command list for the current FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > ?
? No Any Any UserHelp No Any Any Useraddchanloop No Active Group 4addcon Yes Active Group 2addln Yes Active Group 1addlnloop Yes Active Service Group (-1)addport Yes Active Group 1addrscprtn No Active Any Useraddspvc Yes Active Group 2chkflash No Any Strata Group (-2)clear No Any Any Userclrcderrs No Any Super Group (0)clrchancnt No Active Group 5clrchancnts No Active Group 3clrmsgcnt No Active Group 5clrportcnt No Active Group 5clrportcnts No Active Group 5clrsarcnt No Active Group 5clrsarcnts No Active Group 5clrscrn No Any Any User
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-6Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddchanloop
addchanloopAdd a Channel Loopback—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addchanloop command to configure a channel loopback to the current FRSM card. This command causes the channel to loop at the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) stage.
Syntax
addchanloop <port.DLCI|Channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
delchanloop, tstcon, tstdelay, dspcon
Tip To view the loopback status of a connection, use the dspcon command and look for the line labeled ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState.
Attributes
Example
Add channel loopback to port 1, DLCI 16.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > addchanloop 1.16
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be placed in loopback using the format port.DLCI. The range for port numbers is:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C: 1 to 192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C: 1 to 248
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 8 (12IN1-8S back card)
The DLCI range is 16 to 1023.
Channel Enter the channel number for the port as it appears in the dspcons report.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 4
4-7Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
addconAdd Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addcon command to configure one end of an SPVC connection on a port on the current FRSM card.
This software release supports double-ended and single-ended provisioning. Double-ended provisioning requires that you configure the slave end of the SPVC first, and then configure the master end of the SPVC. You can configure both slave and master endpoints for double-ended provisioned connections using the addcon command.
Single-ended provisioning allows you to configure only the master end of the connection, and the master end automatically configures the slave end. This software release supports single ended provisioning where the master end point is defined on another device and the FRSM card hosts the slave connection. This software release does not support single-ended provisioning with a master on the local FRSM card.
When you add a connection, the software checks the configuration at the remote end to be sure the remote connection configuration is compatible. If the local and remote configuration parameters are not compatible, the connection is not added. Table 4-7 shows the connection parameters that are checked when you create a connection.
Tip The addcon command requires you to enter a CIR for the connection and then translates the value you enter into the applicable ATM parameters. You can use addcon command options to override the calculated ATM parameters. When you create a connection from one FRSM card to another, you can configure both ends of the connection with the same CIR and know that the ATM parameters will be calculated the same at each end. If you are creating a connection between a FRSM card and an ATM service module, you need to look at the ATM parameters at each end to be sure they match. To view the ATM parameters that are calculated from the CIR on a FRSM, refer to the parameters labeled ChanConnPCR, ChanConnMCR, and ChanConn SCR in the dspcon command display. To translate an ATM speed in cps to bps for use as the CIR, use the cpstobps command.
Table 4-7 Connection Parameters That Must Match
Connection Type ATM Parameters Checked
CBR PCR
VBRrt, VBRnrt PCR, SCR, MBS
stdABR PCR, MCR
UBR PCR
4-8Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
addcon <port_number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-rmc <RemoteConnId>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>]
Note If the addcon command fails and displays the “Failed to update disk” message, it could be that the PNNI controller has not been added on the PXM1E card. For information on adding the PNNI controller, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
addcon <port number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-rmc <RemoteConnId>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>] [-admin <ConnAdminStatus>]
Tip The difference between the syntax for FRSM-8T1/8E1 series and FRSM-HS2/B series is the -admin option.
Note If the addcon command fails and displays the “Failed to update disk” message, it could be that the PNNI controller has not been added on the PXM1E card. For information on adding the PNNI controller, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM1E) and MGX 8830 Software Configuration Guide, Release 3.
Syntax Description
port_number Port number in the range:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–8 (12IN1-8S back card)
DLCI Data-link connection identifier (DLCI) value.
Range: 16–1023
4-9Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
CIR Committed information rate (CIR) bps value:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C 0–1536000
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–2048000
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–51840000 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–8192000 (12IN1-8S back card)
-cntp Channel internetworking type. Set this option to one of the following:
• 1 = Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking (NIW, FRF.5–default)
• 2 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• 3 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• 4 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 5 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
-contp Controller type. Select one of the following:
• 1 = PAR
• 2 = PNNI (default)
• 3 = MPLS
-sertp Service class type. Select one of the following service types:
• 1 = high priority (CBR–default)
• 2 = rtVBR
• 3 = nrtVBR
• 5 = UBR
• 9 = stdABR
-master Mastership role of connection. Select from the following options:
• 1 = master
• 2 = slave (default)
-rmc Remote connection ID. This option is used when defining the master end of a connection. Enter the slave connection ID as it appears after the addcon command is issued. The format is: RemoteNsapAddress.VPI.VCI.
-pcr Local peak cell rate in cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
4-10Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
-scr Local sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrpcr Peak cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrmcr Minimum cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-ingut Ingress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-ovrid Subscription override. To apply CAC, enter -ovrid 1. To ignore CAC, enter -ovrid 2. Default setting does not apply CAC.
-egrat Egress service rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 2400–1,536,000 bps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 2400–2,048,000 bps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 2400–52,000,000 bps
The default setting is equal to the CIR value entered.
-egut Egress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-bc Burst commit:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-be Burst excess:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-detag Discard Eligible (DE) tagging. To enable DE tagging, enter -detag 1. To disable, enter -detag 2. The default setting disables DE tagging.
4-11Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
-demap DE to Cell Loss Priority (CLP) mapping. Set this option as follows:
• CLP=DE: -demap 1 (default)
• CLP=0: -demap 2
• CLP=1: -demap 3
-clpmap CLP to DE mapping. Set this option as follows:
• DE=CLP: -clpmap 1 (default)
• DE=0: -clpmap 2
• DE=1: -clpmap 3
• Ignore CLP: -clpmap 4
-iqdet Ingress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
-iqecn Ingress queue Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM and FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Range is 1 to 65535 bytes. Default setting is 6553.
-iqdep Ingress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 4510–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
-eqdet Egress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
-eqdep Egress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
4-12Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
-eqecn Egress queue ECN threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 6553.
-cos ATM connection service type. Select from the following:
• CBR1 = 21 (default)
• CBR2 = 31
• CBR3 = 32
• rtVBR1 = 22
• rtVBR2 = 23
• rtVBR3 = 24
• nrtVBR1 = 25
• nrtVBR2 = 26
• nrtVBR3 = 27
• UBR1 = 28
• UBR2 = 29
• stdABR = 30
-maxcost Maximum end-to-end cost for the connection. Range is 1 to 2,147,483,647. Default setting is 2147483647.
-type Trunk restriction option. To restrict the connection routing to terrestrial trunks, enter -type 2. To restrict the connection routing to satellite trunks, enter -type 3. To enable connection routing without trunk restrictions, enter -type 1. Default setting routes connections with no restrictions.
-rtngprio Routing priority for this connection. Range is 1 to 15. Default setting is 8.
-rpcr Remote peak cell rate in cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rscr Remote sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
4-13Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddcon
Related Commands
addspvc, delcon, dspcon, dspcons
Attributes
Example
Add a connection to port 1 using DLCI 16, CIR 4000, and the default settings for all options.
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a >addcon 1 16 4000
Local Connection ID is : 47009181000000000052190a4e000001075b0100.11.35
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a >
-rmcr Remote minimum cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rcbs Remote maximum burst size. Range is 1 to 5,000,000.
-admin Connection administration status. This option applies only to FRSM-HS2/B.
To define the new connection as administratively up, enter -admin 1 or just omit this option. To define a new connection that is administratively down, enter -admin 2.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-14Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddln
addlnAdd Line—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addln command to activate a line on a FRSM card.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
addln <line_num>
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
addln <line_num> <interface_type>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfln, delln, dspln, dsplns
Attributes
Example
Bring up line 8 on a FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > addln 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
line_num Enter the line number you want to activate. For a list of the lines available on the current card, enter the dsplns command.
<interface_type> Specifies the per line interface type and is used only with the 12IN1-8S back card for FRSM-HS2/B. Specify V.35 or X.21. If you do not specify the interface type, the default type is V.35.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-15Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddlnloop
addlnloopAdd Line—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addlnloop command to place a line in loopback mode.
Syntax
addlnloop <line_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspln, dellnloop
Tip Use the dspln command to display the loopback status of a line.
Attributes
Example
Place line 8 on a FRSM-HS2/B card in loopback mode.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > addlnloop 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
line_num Line number, in the range appropriate for the card.
• FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C range = 1–8
• FRSM-HS2/B range:
– 1–2 with HSSI back card
– 1–8 with 12IN1-8S back card
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Service Group
4-16Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddport
addportAdd Port—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addport command to add Frame Relay services to a line.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C Cards
addport <port_num> <line_num> <ds0_speed> <begin_slot> <num_slot> <port_type>
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
addport <port_num> <line_num> <port_type>
Syntax Description
port_num Port number for the Frame Relay service. The port number range varies with the card type:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–2 with HSSI back card
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–8 with 12IN1-8S back card
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line, so you might want to limit the port numbers to 1-8 for easier identification.
line_num Line number to which the port definition applies. The line number range varies with the card type:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–8
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–8
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–2 with HSSI back card
• FRSM-HS2/B range: 1–8 with 12IN1-8S back card
ds0_speed This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and sets the bit rate as either 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps for the DS0:
• 1 = 56 Kbps
• 2 = 64 Kbps
begin_slot This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and selects the starting time slot for port communications over the T1 or E1 frame. Valid slot numbers are:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–24
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–32
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line. Therefore, you should enter 1 for the starting slot so that you can use the full bandwidth of the line.
4-17Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddport
Related Commands
cnfport, delport, dspport, dspports
Attributes
Example
Add port 16 to line 8 on a FRSM-8T1 card, using time slots 20 through 24 and selecting Frame Relay as the port type.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > addport 16 8 1 20 5 1
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
num_slot This option applies only to FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, and FRSM-8E1-C ports and determines the number of consecutive time slots for this port within the T1 or E1 frame. Valid slot numbers are:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C range: 1–24
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C range: 1–32
Tip The nonchannelized FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 cards only support on port per line. Therefore, you should enter the maximum slot number (either 24 or 32) so that you can use the full bandwidth of the line.
port_type Type of service as Frame Relay, FUNI, or frame forwarding.
• 1 = Frame Relay UNI or NNI
• 2 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 3 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-18Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddrscprtn
addrscprtnAdd Resource Partition—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addrscprtn command to add a resource partition after you have deleted the resource partition for a port. A resource partition assigns port resources such as bandwidth and a DLCI range to a specific controller such as PNNI. In this release, a PNNI resource partition is automatically created when a port is created, and all resources are assigned to the PNNI controller.
Syntax
addrscprtn <port_num> <cntrlr_type> <pct_bw_ingr> <pct_bw_egr> <min_dlci> <max_dlci> <max_lcn> <cntrlr_id>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfrscprtn, delrscprtn, dsprscprtn
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
port_num Port number to be partitioned. You must add a port to a line before you can define a partition for a port. Use the dspports command to view the available ports.
cntrlr_type Controller for this partition. Enter 2 as the PNNI controller is the only controller type supported in this release.
• PAR = 1
• PNNI = 2
• MPLS = 3
pct_bw_ingr Ingress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for ingress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
pct_bw_egr Egress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for egress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
min_dlci Minimum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_dlci Maximum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_lcn Maximum LCN to be used on this port. Range is 1 to 1000.
cntrlr_id Enter a number that will be associated with the controller used by this partition. Range is 1 to 255.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-19Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddrscprtn
Example
The following example adds a resource partition to a port after the default partition was deleted.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > addrscprtn 6 2 100 100 16 1023 1000 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-20Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
addspvcAdd SPVC—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the addspvc command to configure one end of an SPVC connection on a port on the current FRSM card.
This software release supports double-ended and single-ended provisioning. Double-ended provisioning requires that you configure the slave end of the SPVC first, and then configure the master end of the SPVC. You can configure both slave and master endpoints for double-ended provisioned connections using the addspvc command.
Single-ended provisioning allows you to configure only the master end of the connection, and the master end automatically configures the slave end. This software release supports single ended provisioning where the master end point is defined on another device and the FRSM card hosts the slave connection. This software release does not support single-ended provisioning with a master on the local FRSM card.
When you add a connection, the software checks the configuration at the remote end to be sure the remote connection configuration is compatible. If the local and remote configuration parameters are not compatible, the connection is not added. Table 4-7 shows the connection parameters that are checked when you create a connection.
Tip The addspvc command requires you to enter a CIR for the connection and then translates the value you enter into the applicable ATM parameters. You can use addspvc command options to override the calculated ATM parameters. When you create a connection from one FRSM card to another, you can configure both ends of the connection with the same CIR and know that the ATM parameters will be calculated the same at each end. If you are creating a connection between a FRSM card and an ATM service module, you need to look at the ATM parameters at each end to be sure they match. To view the ATM parameters that are calculated from the CIR on a FRSM, refer to the parameters labeled ChanConnPCR, ChanConnMCR, and ChanConn SCR in the dspcon command display. To translate an ATM speed in cps to bps for use as the CIR, use the cpstobps command.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
addspvc <port number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-rmc <RemoteConnId>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>]
4-21Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
addspvc <port number> <DLCI> <CIR> [-cntp <ChanIntworkingType>] [-contp <ControllerType>] [-sertp <ServiceClassTtype>] [-master <MasterShip>] [-rmc <RemoteConnId>] [-pcr <localPCR>] [-scr <localSCR>] [-abrpcr <ABRPCR>] [-abrmcr <ABRMCR>] [-ingut <IngrPercentUtil>] [-ovrid <OvrSubOvrRide>] [-egrat <EgrSrvRate>] [-egut <EgrPercentUtil>] [-bc <BurstCommit>] [-be <BurstExcess>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-demap <DEtoCLPmap>] [-clpmap <CLPtoDEmap>] [-iqdet <IngressDEThresh>] [-iqecn <IngressQECNthresh>] [-iqdep <IngressQDepth>] [-eqdet <EgressDEThresh>] [-eqdep <EgressQDepth>] [-eqecn <EgressQECNThresh>] [-cos <ATMConnServiceType>] [-maxcost <MaxCost>] [-type <restrictedType>] [-rtngprio <RoutingPriority>] [-rpcr <RemotePCR>] [-rscr <RemoteSCR>] [-rmcr <RemoteMCR>] [-rcbs <RemoteMaxBurstSize>] [-admin <ConnAdminStatus>]
Tip The difference between the syntax for FRSM-8T1/8E1 series and FRSM-HS2/B series is the -admin option.
Syntax Description
port number Port number in the range:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 1–8 (12IN1-8S back card)
DLCI Data-link connection identifier (DLCI) value.
Range: 16–1023
CIR Committed information rate (CIR) bps value:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C 0–1536000
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–2048000
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–51840000 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–8192000 (12IN1-8S back card)
-cntp Channel internetworking type. Set this option to one of the following:
• 1 = Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking (NIW, FRF.5—default)
• 2 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• 3 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• 4 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 5 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
-contp Controller type. Select one of the following:
• 1 = PAR
• 2 = PNNI (default)
• 3 = MPLS
4-22Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
-sertp Service class type. Select one of the following service types:
• 1 = high priority (CBR—default)
• 2 = rtVBR
• 3 = nrtVBR
• 5 = UBR
• 9 = stdABR
-master Mastership role of connection. Select from the following options:
• 1 = master
• 2 = slave (default)
-rmc Remote connection ID. This option is used when defining the master end of a connection. Enter the slave connection ID as it appears after the addcon command is issued. The format is: RemoteNsapAddress.VPI.VCI.
-pcr Local peak cell ratein cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-scr Local sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrpcr Peak cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-abrmcr Minimum cell rate for ABR connections:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-ingut Ingress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-ovrid Subscription override. To apply CAC, enter -ovrid 1. To ignore CAC, enter -ovrid 2. Default setting does not apply CAC.
4-23Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
-egrat Egress service rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 2400–1,536,000 bps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 2400–2,048,000 bps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 2400–52,000,000 bps
The default setting is equal to the CIR value entered.
-egut Egress percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent. Default setting is 100 percent.
-bc Burst commit:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-be Burst excess:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 0–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-detag Discard Eligible (DE) tagging. To enable DE tagging, enter -detag 1. To disable, enter -detag 2. The default setting disables DE tagging.
-demap DE to Cell Loss Priority (CLP) mapping. Set this option as follows:
• CLP=DE: -demap 1 (default)
• CLP=0: -demap 2
• CLP=1: -demap 3
-clpmap CLP to DE mapping. Set this option as follows:
• DE=CLP: -clpmap 1 (default)
• DE=0: -clpmap 2
• DE=1: -clpmap 3
• Ignore CLP: -clpmap 4
-iqdet Ingress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
-iqecn Ingress queue Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Range is 1 to 65535 bytes. Default setting is 6553.
4-24Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
-iqdep Ingress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 4510–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 4510–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
-eqdet Egress queue DE threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 32767.
-eqdep Egress queue depth:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 65535.
-eqecn Egress queue ECN threshold:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–65,535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–2,097,151 bytes
Default setting is 6553.
-cos ATM connection service type. Select from the following:
• CBR1 = 21 (default)
• CBR2 = 31
• CBR3 = 32
• rtVBR1 = 22
• rtVBR2 = 23
• rtVBR3 = 24
• nrtVBR1 = 25
• nrtVBR2 = 26
• nrtVBR3 = 27
• UBR1 = 28
• UBR2 = 29
• stdABR = 30
-maxcost Maximum end-to-end cost for the connection. Range is 1 to 2,147,483,647. Default setting is 2147483647.
-type Trunk restriction option. To restrict the connection routing to terrestrial trunks, enter -type 2. To restrict the connection routing to satellite trunks, enter -type 3. To enable connection routing without trunk restrictions, enter -type 1. Default setting routes connections with no restrictions.
4-25Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceaddspvc
Related Commands
delcon, dspcon, dspcons
Attributes
Example
Add a SPVC slave endpoint to port 1 using DLCI 16, CIR 4000, and the default settings for all options.
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a >addspvc 1 16 4000
Local Connection ID is : 47009181000000000052190a4e000001075b0100.11.35
PXM1E_SJ.VHSHS2B.a >
-rtngprio Routing priority for this connection. Range is 1 to 15. Default setting is 8.
-rpcr Remote peak cell rate in cells per second (cps):
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rscr Remote sustainable cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rmcr Remote minimum cell rate:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 10–10000 cps
• FRSM-HS2/B = 10–198412 cps
The default setting is calculated based on the CIR value entered.
-rcbs Remote maximum burst size. Range is 1 to 5,000,000.
-admin Connection administration status. This option applies only to FRSM-HS2/B.
To define the new connection as administratively up, enter -admin 1 or just omit this option. To define a new connection that is administratively down, enter -admin 2.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-26Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencechkflash
chkflashCheck Flash—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the chkflash command to display the length of the boot software file and the status of the checksum.
Syntax
chkflash
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspcd, version
Attributes
Example
Check the boot software status on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > chkflashProgram length = 300145Calculated checksum = 147bc308 stored checksum = 147bc308Flash checksum passed
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Strata Group
4-27Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclear
clearClear Screen—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, 2T3E3, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clear command to clear any previous commands from the session screen or window.
Syntax
clear
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cls, clscrn
Attributes
Example
After you enter the clear command, the only text that appears on the screen is the CLI prompt.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-28Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclralm
clralmClear Alarm—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the clralm command to clear any active alarms on a specific line of the current FRSM card. The alarms will not clear if the alarm cause is still present.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
clralm -ds1 <line>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clralms, dspalm, dspalms
Attributes
Example
Clear the active alarms for line 2 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clralm -ds1 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line Line number for the line you want to display the alarm configuration. Use dsplns to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
4-29Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclralmcnt
clralmcntClear Alarm Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the clralmcnt command to clear the alarm counters for a line on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
clralmcnt -ds1 <line>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clralmcnts, dspalmcnt
Attributes
Example
Clear the alarm counters for line 2 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clralmcnt -ds1 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line Line number for the line you want to display the alarm configuration. Use dsplns to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
4-30Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclralmcnts
clralmcntsClear Alarm Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the clralmcnts command to clear the alarm counters for all lines on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
clralmcnts
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clralmcnt, dspalmcnt
Attributes
Example
Clear the alarm counters for all lines on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clralmcnts
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
4-31Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclralms
clralmsClear Alarms—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the clralms command to clear active alarms on all lines of the current FRSM card. The alarms will not clear if the alarm cause is still present.
Syntax
clralms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clralm, dspalm, dspalms
Attributes
Example
Clear the active alarms for all lines on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clralms
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
4-32Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrcderrs
clrcderrsClear Hardware/Reset Errors in BRAM—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrcderrs command to clear all card-related errors on a FRSM card. No response messages appear on screen.
Syntax
clrcderrs
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspcderrs
Attributes
Example
Clear all card-related errors on the FRSM in slot 4.
PXM1E_SJ.1.4.FRSM.a > clrcderrsPXM1E_SJ.1.4.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Super Group
4-33Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrchancnt
clrchancntClear Channel Statistics Count—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrchancnt command to clear the statistics counters for a connection.
Syntax
clrchancnt <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clrchancnts, dspchancnt, dspchans, dspcons,
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the statistics for channel 19.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrchancnt 19
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection where statistics are to be cleared using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection where statistics are to be cleared. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-34Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrchancnts
clrchancntsClear Channel Statistics Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrchancnts command to clear the statistics counters for all connections on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
clrchancnts
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrchancnt, dspchancnt, dspchans, dspcons
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the statistics for all channels on the FRSM card in slot 30.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrchancnts
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 3
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 3
4-35Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrmsgcnt
clrmsgcntClear Message Count—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrmsgcnt command to clear the message counters for the current FRSM card.
Syntax
clrmsgcnt
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspmsgcnt
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the message counters for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrmsgcnt
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-36Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrportcnt
clrportcntClear Port Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrportcnt command to clear counter values on a specified port associated with the current FRSM.
Syntax
clrportcnt <port_ number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clrportcnts, dspportcnt
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the counters on port 6 of the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrportcnt 6
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port_ number Port number on which to delete the counters. Use the dspports command to view the configured ports.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-37Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrportcnts
clrportcntsClear Port Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrportcnts command to clear all port counters on the current FRSM.
Syntax
clrportcnts
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrportcnt, dspportcnt
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the counters on all ports of the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrportcnts
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-38Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrsarcnt
clrsarcntClear SAR Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrsarcnt command to clear the Segmentation And Reassembly (SAR) counter statistics for a specific connection.
Syntax
clrsarcnt <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clrsarcnts, dspsarcnt, dspsarcnts
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the SAR counters for channel 35 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrsarcnt 35
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection counters to be cleared using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection counters to be cleared. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-39Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrsarcnts
clrsarcntsClear SAR Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrsarcnts command to clear the Segmentation And Reassembly (SAR) counter statistics for all connections on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
clrsarcnts
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrsarcnt, dspsarcnt, dspsarcnts
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Clear the SAR counters on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrsarcnts
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Group 5
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 5
4-40Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrscrn
clrscrnClear Screen—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrscrn command to clear any previous commands from the session screen or window.
Syntax
clrscrn
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cls
Attributes
Example
After you enter the clrscrn command, the only text that appears on the screen is the CLI prompt.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-41Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrslftst
clrslftstClear Self-Test—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrslftst command to clear the pass and fail columns in the self test table, which you can view with the dspslftsttbl command.
Syntax
clrslftst
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfslftst, dspslftst, dspslftsttbl, runslftstno
Attributes
Example
After you enter the clrscrn command, the only text that appears on the screen is the CLI prompt.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrslftst
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any State Privilege: Any User
4-42Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceclrtaskinfo
clrtaskinfoClear Task Information—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the clrtaskinfo command to clear the task information counters that can be displayed with the dsptaskinfo command.
Syntax
clrtaskinfo
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsptaskinfo
Attributes
Example
Clear the task information counters.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > clrtaskinfo
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Service Group
4-43Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecls
clsClear Screen—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cls command to clear any previous commands from the session screen or window.
Syntax
cls
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrscrn
Attributes
Example
After you enter the cls command, the only text that appears on the screen is the CLI prompt.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-44Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchan
cnfchanConfigure Channel—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchan command to modify a channel configuration.
Syntax
cnfchan <channel> <RoutingPriority> <MaxCost> <restrictedType> <PercentUtil>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchan, dspchans
Attributes
Example
Modify channel 19 to use only 50 percent of the bandwidth available on satellite links.
PXM1E_SJ1.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > cnfchan 19 8 2147483647 3 50
PXM1E_SJ1.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
channel Specify the channel to be modified. You can view channel information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
RoutingPriority Routing priority for this connection. Range is 1 to 15.
MaxCost Maximum end-to-end cost for the channel. Range is 1 to 2,147,483,647.
restrictedType Trunk restriction type. To restrict the channel routing to terrestrial trunks, enter -type 2. To restrict the channel routing to satellite trunks, enter -type 3. To enable channel routing without trunk restrictions, enter -type 1.
PercentUtil Percent utilization. Range is 1 to 100 percent.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-45Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanabrparams
cnfchanabrparamsConfigure Channel ABR Parameters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanabrparams command to configure ABR parameters for a specific connection on the current FRSM.
Syntax
cnfchanabrparams <port.DLCI|channel> <rif > <rdf> <nrm> <trm> <tbe> <frtt> <adtf> <cdf>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchanabrrates, cnfchanstdabr, cnfstdabrctrl, dspchanstdabr, dspfeature, dspstdabrctrl
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be configured. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
rif The Rate Increase Factor controls the amount by which the cell transmission rate may increase upon receipt of an RM cell. RIF is a power of 2.
Range: 1–32768 (in steps of power of 2)
rdf The Rate Decrease Factor controls the decrease in the cell transmission rate. RDF is a power of 2.
Range: 1–32768 (in steps of power of 2)
nrm The Inrate Cell Count is the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward RM cell.
Range: 2–256 (in steps of power of 2)
trm The Max Delay for FRM provides an upper bound on the time between forward RM cells for an active source.
Range: 3–255 msec
tbe The Transient Buffer Exposure is the negotiated number of cells that the network would like to limit the source to sending during startup periods, before the first RM cell returns.
Range: 0–16777215 cells
frtt The Fixed Round Trip Time is the sum of the fixed and propagation delays from the source to the furthest destination and back.
Range: 0–16700 msec
adtf The ACR decrease time factor is the time permitted between sending RM-cells before the rate is decreased to ICR.
Range: 10–10230 msec
cdf The Cutoff Decrease Factor controls the decrease in ACR associated with CRM.
Range: 0–64 (in steps of power of 2)
4-46Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanabrparams
Attributes
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-47Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanabrrates
cnfchanabrratesConfigure Channel ABR Rates—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanabrrates command to configure the rate parameters for a specific ABR channel.
Syntax
cnfchanabrrates <port.DLCI|channel> <MCR> <PCR> <ICR>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanstdabr, cnfstdabrctrl, dspchanstdabr, dspfeature, dspstdabrctrl
Attributes
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be configured. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
MCR Minimum cell rate (MCR) allowed. The peak cell rate (PCR) and the MCR define the allowable cell rate (ACR) range. The MCR is the rate at which the source is always allowed to send. The MCR includes bandwidth occupied by both data cells and the inrate RM cells.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
PCR Peak cell rate allowed. The PCR and the MCR define the allowable cell rate (ACR) range. The PCR includes bandwidth occupied by both data cells and the in-rate RM cps.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
ICR Initial cell rate is the rate to which a source should send initially and after an idle period.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
Log: yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-48Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchancacoff
cnfchancacoffConfigure Channel CAC Off—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchancacoff command to turn off the connection admission control (CAC) function for a channel.
Tip You can use the cnfcon command to turn CAC on or off.
Syntax
cnfchancacoff <chan_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfcon, dspchan, dspcon
Attributes
Example
On current FRSM in slot 30, change configuration for channel 35 to turn off connection admission control (CAC) function.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfchancacoff 35
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
chan_num Specifies the channel number for which you are modifying the policing parameter. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-49Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanegressq
cnfchanegressqConfigure Channel Egress Queue—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanegressq command to configure the egress queue for a specified channel.
Syntax
cnfchanegressq <port.DLCI|channel> <QSel> <QDepth> <QDEThresh> <QECNThresh>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchaningressq
Attributes
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be modified using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be modified. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
QSel Egress queue select.
• 1 = High-priority queue, usually used for constant bit rate (CBR) connections.
• 2 = Low-priority queue (default).
• 3 = Not used.
QDepth Egress queue depth. This setting is the maximum allowable depth for the queue before it starts dropping cells.
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes
QDEThresh Egress queue DE Threshold. This setting is the maximum depth for the queue before the cells are tagged as discard eligible (DE).
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 32767 bytes
QECNThresh Egress queue ECN Threshold. This setting is the maximum depth for the queue before initiating flow control.
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-50Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanegressq
Example
On current FRSM in slot 27, change configuration of egress queue for channel 16 to set the priority to high, the maximum queue depth to 65535, the Discard Eligible threshold to 32767, and the ECN threshold to 65535.
spirit.1.27.FRSM.a > cnfchanegressq 16 1 65535 32767 65535spirit.1.27.FRSM.a >
4-51Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchaneir
cnfchaneirConfigure Channel EIR—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchaneir command to configure the Frame Relay policing parameter excess information rate (EIR), which is the second bucket leak rate for a channel. No messages appear on the screen unless an error occurs.
Syntax
cnfchaneir <chan_num> <zerocireir>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchan, dspcon
Attributes
Example
Set the zero CIR EIR on channel 35 to 10,000.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfchaneir 35 10000
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
chan_num Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
zerocireir Specifies the excess information rate for 0 CIR cases. The following are the values:
• FRSM-8T1 and 8T1/C: 0–1536000 bps
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1/C: 0–2048000 bps
• FRSM-HS2/B: 0–51840000 bps
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-52Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchaningressq
cnfchaningressqConfigure Channel Ingress Queue—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchaningressq command to configure the ingress queue for a specified channel.
Syntax
cnfchaningressq <port.DLCI|channel> <QDepth> <QDEThresh> <QECNThresh>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchanegressq
Attributes
Example
On current FRSM in slot 27, change configuration of ingress queue for channel 16 to set the maximum queue depth to 65535, the Discard Eligible threshold to 32767, and the ECN threshold to 65535.
spirit.1.27.FRSM.a > cnfchaningressq 16 65535 32767 65535spirit.1.27.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be modified using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be modified. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
QDepth Ingress queue depth. This setting is the maximum allowable depth for the queue before it starts dropping cells.
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes
QDEThresh Ingress queue DE Threshold. This setting is the maximum depth for the queue before the cells are tagged as discard eligible (DE).
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 32767 bytes
QECNThresh Ingress queue ECN Threshold. This setting is the maximum depth for the queue before initiating flow control.
Range: 1–65535 bytes
Default: 65535 bytes
Log: Yes State: Any Privilege: Group 2
4-53Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanmap
cnfchanmapConfigure Channel Map—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanmap command to configure interworking for a specified channel and to configure FECN, DE, and CLP mapping.
Syntax
cnfchanmap <port.DLCI|channel> <chanType> <FECN/EFCI> <DE to CLP> <CLP to DE>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchanmap
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
chanType Channel type.
• 1 = Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking (NIW, FRF.5)
• 2 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• 3 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• 4 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 5 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
FECN/EFCI Mapping between FECN and EFCI.
• 1 = map EFCI (this option valid only for SIW)
• 2 = make EFCI 0
DE to CLP DE to CLP mapping.
• 1 = map DE to CLP
• 2 = make CLP 0
• 3 = make CLP 1
CLP to DE CLP to DE mapping.
• 1 = map CLP to DE
• 2 = make DE 0
• 3 = make DE 1
• 4 = ignore CLP (this option valid only for NIW)
4-54Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanmap
Attributes
Example
On current FRSM in slot 30, change configuration of the interworking channel mapping for channel 16 to set the channel type to network interworking, set EFCI equal to 0, the DE to CLP mapping to map DE to CLP, and the CLP to DE mapping to map CLP to DE.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfchanmap 16 1 1 1
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-55Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanpol
cnfchanpolConfigure Channel Policing—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanpol command to configure the Frame Relay policing parameters for a channel. No messages appear on screen unless an error occurs.
Syntax
cnfchanpol <port.DLCI|channel> <cir> <bc> <be> <ibs> <detag> <egrat>
Syntax Description
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
cir Committed information rate, in the range appropriate for the interface.
• T1 range: 0–1536000 bps
• E1 range: 0–2048000 bps
• HSSI range: 0–51840000 bps
Note Default: 2400 bps
bc Burst committed rate, in the range appropriate for the FRSM card type.
• FRSM-8T1/E1 range: 0–65535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2 range: 0–2097151 bytes
Default: 5100 bytes
Note The burst committed value cannot be 0 when the committed information rate is not 0. The burst committed value MUST be set to 0 when the committed information rate is set to 0.
be Burst excess rate, in the range appropriate for the FRSM card type.
• FRSM-8T1/E1 range: 0–65535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2 range: 0–2097151 bytes
Default: 5100 bytes
Note The burst excess value cannot be 0 when the committed information rate is set to 0.
4-56Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanpol
Related Commands
dspchan
Attributes
ibs Initial burst size, in the range appropriate for the FRSM card type.
• FRSM-8T1/E1 range: 0–65535 bytes
• FRSM-HS2 range: 0–2097151 bytes
Default: 100 bytes
Note The initial burst size should be less than or equal to the value of the burst committed when the committed information rate is set to greater than 0.When the committed information rate is set to 0, the initial burst size MUST be set to 0.
detag Value to enable or disable ingress discard eligible (DE) tagging.
• 1 = enable
• 2 = disable (default)
egrat Egress service rate, in the range appropriate for the interface.
• T1 range: 0–1536000 bps
• E1 range: 0–2048000 bps
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-57Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchansrvrate
cnfchansrvrateConfigure Channel Service Rate—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchansrvrate command to provision the service rate of a channel independent of the CIR rate of the connection. This feature separates the policing parameters (CIR, BC, BE, IBS) from the service rate, providing you with more traffic management control over the connection.
Syntax
cnfchansrvrate <port.DLCI|channel> <srvord> <srvrate>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Configure the SAR on current FRSM, service connection 16, at 4000 cps, even though the CIR for the connection may be set to 0.
NODENAME.1.26.FRSM.a > cnfchansrvrate 16 1 4000NODENAME.1.26.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
srvord Channel service rate override programming option.
• 1 = enable
• 2 = disable
srvrate The actual channel service rate to be provisioned for the given channel (in cps).
• FRSM-8T1/E1 Range: 10–10000 cps
• HS2/B Range: 10–198412
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-58Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanstdabr
cnfchanstdabrConfigure Channel for Standard ABR—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfchanstdabr command to configure standard ABR parameters.
The FRSM-8T1/E1 supports only Terminating Standard ABR—source/destination behavior. While at least one control loop between source and destination end systems is required, you can choose to segment the control loop. Using this method, an intermediate switch can close the control loop and initiate a new control loop by behaving as both a destination and a new source. Source/destination behavior is useful when you need to reduce the length of individual control loops, or create separate control domains for administrative reasons.
Syntax
cnfchanstdabr <port.DLCI|channel> <mcr> <pcr> <icr> <rif > <rdf> <nrm> <trm> <tbe> <frtt> <adtf> <cdf>
Syntax Description
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
mcr Minimum cell rate allowed. The PCR and the MCR define the Allowable Cell Rate (ACR) range. The MCR is the rate at which the source is always allowed to send. The MCR shall include bandwidth occupied by both data cells and the inrate RM cells.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
pcr Peak cell rate allowed. The PCR and the MCR define the Allowable Cell Rate (ACR) range. The PCR shall include bandwidth occupied by both data cells and the inrate RM cells.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
icr Initial cell rate is the rate to which a source should send initially and after an idle period.
FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8E1 Range: 10–10000 cells/sec
Range: 10–198412 cells/sec
rif Rate increase factor controls the amount by which the cell transmission rate may increase upon receipt of an RM cell.
Range: 1–32768 (in steps of power of 2)
rdf Rate decrease factor controls the decrease in the cell transmission rate. RDF is a power of 2.
Range: 1–32768 (in steps of power of 2)
4-59Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfchanstdabr
Related Commands
cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanabrrates, cnfstdabrctrl, dspchanstdabr, dspfeature, dspstdabrctrl
Attributes
nrm The inrate cell count is the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward RM cell.
Range: 2–256 (in steps of power of 2)
trm The maximum delay for FRM provides an upper bound on the time between forward RM cells for an active source.
Range: 3–255 msec
tbe The transient buffer exposure is a negotiated number of cells that the network would like to limit the source to sending during startup periods, before the first RM cell returns.
Range: 0–16777215 cells
frtt The fixed round trip time is the sum of the fixed and propagation delays from the source to the furthest destination and back.
Range: 0–16700
adtf The ACR decrease time factor is the time permitted between sending RM-cells before the rate is decreased to ICR.
Range: 10–10230 msec
cdf Cutoff decrease factor controls the decrease in ACR associated with CRM.
Range: 0–64 (in steps of power of 2)
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-60Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfclktype
cnfclktypeConfigure Clock Type—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfclktype command to configure the line clock type for a specific FRSM line.
Syntax
cnfclktype <line_num> <clock_type>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspln
Attributes
Example
Set the line 1 clock type so that the receive clock is not inverted and the transmit clock is not looped.
Janus1.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > cnfclktype 1 1
*********** LINE CFG DISK UPDATE FROM FRSM ***********Line Num = 1Row Status = 3
Janus1.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
line_num Enter the number of the line you want to configure. Use the dsplns command to display the available lines.
clock_type Select the clock configuration for the line:
• RXCnotInverted& TXCnotLooped = 1
• RXCinverted& TXCnotLooped = 2
• RXCnotInverted& TXClooped = 3 (default)
• RXCinverted& TXClooped = 4
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-61Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfcon
cnfconConfigure Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfcon command to modify a connection that was created with the addcon command.
Syntax
cnfcon <port.DLCI> <ChanIntworkingType> <CIR> [CAC]
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dspcon, dspcons
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be configured using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
ChanIntworkingType Channel internetworking type. Set this option to one of the following:
• 1 = Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking (NIW, FRF.5—default)
• 2 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• 3 = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• 4 = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• 5 = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
CIR Committed information rate (CIR) bps value:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C 0–1536000
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–2048000
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–51840000 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B = 0–8192000 (12IN1-8S back card)
CAC This optional parameter enables or disables Connection Admission Control. Select one of the following:
• 1 = Enable
• 2 = Disable (default)
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-62Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfcon
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Change connection on port 1, DLCI 16 to use a new CIR.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > cnfcon 1.30 1 32000
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-63Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfegrq
cnfegrqConfigure Egress Queue—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfegrq command to configure the egress queue parameters for a specific port. This command is valid only when the egress quality of service feature is enabled.
Syntax
cnfegrq <port_number> <serv_type> <qdepth> <qdethresh> <qecnthresh>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfegrservtype, dspegrq, dspegrqs, dspegrservtype
Attributes
Example
Change the port egress queue parameters for port 1, service 1.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > cnfegrq 1 1 65535 32767 32767
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
port_number Specify the number for the port you want to view. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
serv_type Select the service type to configure:
• Waited fair queue, highPriorityQ = 1
• Waited fair queue, rtVBRQ = 2
• Waited fair queue, nrtVBRQandABRQ = 3
• Waited fair queue, UBRQ = 4
• Ratio queue, highPriorityQ = 1
• Ratio queue, lowPriorityQ = 2
qdepth Egress queue depth. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 2097151.
qdethresh Egress queue DE threshold. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 2097151.
qecnthresh Egress queue ECN threshold. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 2097151.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-64Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfegrservtype
cnfegrservtypeConfigure Egress Servicing Type—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfegrservtype command to change the egress port servicing algorithm. Egress port queue servicing type is a card-level option. You can choose either four-queue, weighted fair queuing (WFQ) algorithm with quality of service (QoS) guaranteed, or simple ratio-based, two-queue algorithm without quality of service.
Syntax
cnfegrservtype <servicing type>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfegrq, dspegrq, dspegrqs, dspegrservtype
Attributes
Example
Configure egress service type to queue ratio.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > cnfegrservtype 99The card will be reset, Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y
(session fell back)
PXM1E_SJ.7.PXM.a >
servicing type A value representing one of the following servicing types:
• 87 = WFQ algorithm with four queues.
• 99 = Ratio-based algorithm with two queues.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Super Group
4-65Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfln
cnflnConfigure Line—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the optional cnfln command to configure line characteristics after the line becomes active (see addln).
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
cnfln <line_num> <line_code> <line_len> <clk_src> [E1-signalling]
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
cnfln <line_num> <line_type> <serial_line_rate> [-intrtyp interface_type] [-freqth dte_clk_thresh]
Syntax Description
line_num Enter the number of the line you want to configure. Use the dsplns command to display the available lines.
line_code Select the line coding:
• B8ZS (T1) = 2
• HDB3 (E1) = 3
• AMI (T1/E1) = 4
line_len Enter the length of the line:
• T1 range:
– 0 to 131 feet = 10
– 131 to 262 feet = 11
– 262 to 393 feet = 12
– 393 to 524 feet = 13
– 524 to 655 feet = 14
– >655 feet = 15
• E1 (with SMB line module) = 8
• E1 (with RJ48 line module) = 9
clk_src DSX1 clock source.
• 1 = loop clock
• 2 = local clock
E1-signalling This option selects E1 signalling methods. Enter the keyword for the signalling combination listed below:
• CAS, no CRC = CAS
• CAS with CRC = CAS_CRC
• CCS, no CRC = CCS
• CCS, with CRC = CCS_CRC
• Clear E1 = CLEAR
4-66Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfln
Related Commands
addln, delln, dsplns, dspln
Attributes
Example
Configure line 6 for a line length greater than 655 feet and leave the other parameters set to the defaults.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfln 6 2 15 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line_type Select the line type from the following:
• DTE = 1
• DCE = 2
• DTE_ST (V.35 only) = 3
serial_line_rate Specify a serial line rate from the following ranges:
• HSSI: 48000 to 51840000 bps
• V.35/X.21: 48000 to 10240000 bps
Note Specify the serial line rate in multiples of 1000. For example, the following are valid line rates: 50000, 51845000, 10238000.
-intrtyp interface_type
This option selects the interface type when the MGX-12IN1-4S back card is used. Select from the following options:
• X.21 = 2
• V.35 = 3 (default)
-freqth dte_clk_thresh
This option sets the DTE clock threshold. The range is 1 to 5 percent. The default value is 3 percent.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-67Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnflnloop
cnflnloopConfigure Line Loop—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the cnflnloop command to enable or disable code detection when the specified line is placed in loopback mode.
Tip Use the dspln command to display the configuration for loopback mode.
Syntax
cnflnloop <line_num> <lpbkCodeDetection>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addlnloop, dellnloop, dspln, dsplns
Attributes
Example
Enable code detection for line 6 in loopback mode.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnflnloop 6 2
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
line_num Line number for which you want to configure code detection. Use the dsplns command to view the available lines.
lpbkCodeDetection Loopback code detection parameter. Enter 1 to disable code detection or 2 to enable code detection.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Service Group
4-68Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfm32eqthresh
cnfm32eqthreshConfigure M32 Egress Queue Threshold—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the cnfm32eqthresh command to assign a M32 egress queue threshold value to a port.
Syntax
cnfm32eqthresh <port_num> <threshold>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspm32eqthresh, dspports
Attributes
Example
Set the M32 threshold queue value for port 6 to 5000 bytes.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfm32eqthresh 6 5000
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
port_num Enter the port number that you want to configure. To display a list of available ports, use the dspports command.
threshold Enter a threshold value in the range of 1 to 6000 bytes.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-69Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfoamlpbk
cnfoamlpbkConfigure OAM Loopback—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfoamlpbk command to configure the OAM loopback test. This nonintrusive test sends OAM cells to an idle connection, one not receiving data for a whole minute, to verify connection continuity. No remote end loopback is necessary for this test to run. OAM cells are automatically recognized and returned without the need for the remote end to be looping back all data. If the endpoints reside in FastPacket cards, then “test delay” cells are transmitted instead of OAM loopback cells.
The OAM cell is initiated at an endpoint and sent into the network, where it will be returned by the card at the remote end of the connection. (Note that the cells do not go through NNI trunks.) When ten consecutive cells are not received, the connection is declared failed. The test logs alarms when significant continuous cell loss is encountered.
Once a failed connection is detected, the local end from which the test started sends a network message to the endpoint node indicating a failure. This provides consistent network views for both ends of the connection.
Syntax
cnfoamlpbk <action> <frequency>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspoamlpbk
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
action One of the following actions:
• 1 = OamRas enabled
• 2 = OamRas disabled
frequency Frequency at which the loopback cells are sent.
Range: 1–10 min
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-70Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfoamlpbk
Example
Enable OAM loopback cells every 10 minutes on the current FRSM card.
Corvette.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfoamlpbk 1 10
Corvette.1.11.FRSM.a >
4-71Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfport
cnfportConfigure Port—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfport command to configure a port on a FRSM. Verify the configuration using the dspport command.
Syntax
cnfport <port_num> <lmi_sig> <asyn> <ELMI> <T391> <T392> <N391> <N392> <N393>
Syntax Description
port number Specify the number for the port you want to configure. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
lmi_sig LMI signaling protocol type.
• None = n (default)
• StrataLMI = s
• AnnexAUNI = au
• AnnexDUNI = du
• AnnexANNI = an
• AnnexDNNI = dn
Note When LMI is configured, the maximum number of connections per port for strataLMI port is 560 and for Annex A/D UNI/NNI port is 898.
asyn Enable or disable asynchronous update options.
• Update Status (UPD) and Unsolicited Full Status (UFD) disabled = n or 1 (default)
• UPD enabled = y or 2
• UFD enabled = 3
• UPD and UFS enabled = 4
ELMI Enable or disable enhanced LMI.
• Disable = n or N (default)
• Enable = y or Y
T391 T391 timer. This setting is the interval in seconds for NNI status polling.
Range: 5–30 sec
Default: 10
T392 T392 timer. This setting is the interval in seconds for UNI status polling.
Range: 5–30 sec
Default: 15
N391 N391 counter. This setting establishes the number of UNI/NNI polling cycles.
Range: 1–255
Default: 6
4-72Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfport
Related Commands
addport, delport, dspport, dspports
Attributes
Example
Change the LMI signaling for port 8 to StrataLMI and leave all other parameters set to the default values.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfport 8 s n n 10 15 6 3 4
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
N392 N392 counter. This setting is the UNI/NNI error threshold.
Range: 1–10
Default: 3
N393 N393 counter. This setting is the UNI/NNI monitored events threshold, which must be greater than N392.
Range: 1–10
Default = 4
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-73Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfportcllm
cnfportcllmConfigure Port CLLM—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfportcllm command to set consolidated link layer management (CLLM) parameters for a specified port on the current card. Use CLLM to pass ForeSight to another Cisco WAN switching network using NNI.
Tip Use the dspport command to view the CLLM configuration for a port.
Syntax
cnfportcllm <port_num> <CLLMEN> <CLLMTM>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspport
Attributes
Example
Enable CLLM on port 8 and set the timer to 1 second.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfportcllm 8 2 1000
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
port number Specify the number for the port you want to configure. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
CLLMEN Enable or disable CLLM.
• 1 = disable (default)
• 2 = enable
CLLMTM CLLM time. This setting is the amount of time to wait to receive CLLM updates before timing out.
Range: 40–5000 ms
Default: 1000 (1 sec)
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-74Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfrscprtn
cnfrscprtnConfigure Resource Partition—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfrscprtn command to modify a resource partition configuration. A resource partition assigns port resources such as bandwidth and a DLCI range to a specific controller such as PNNI. In this release, a PNNI resource partition is automatically created when a port is created, and all resources are assigned to the PNNI controller.
Syntax
cnfrscprtn <port_num> <cntrlr_type> <pct_bw_ingr> <pct_bw_egr> <min_dlci> <max_dlci> <max_lcn> <cntrlr_id>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addrscprtn, dsprscprtn, delrscprtn
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
port_num Port number to be partitioned. You must add a port to a line before you can define a partition for a port. Use the dspports command to view the available ports.
cntrlr_type Controller for this partition:
• PAR = 1
• PNNI = 2
• MPLS = 3
pct_bw_ingr Ingress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for ingress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
pct_bw_egr Egress bandwidth percentage. Enter the percentage of the line bandwidth to be used by this controller for egress communications. Range is 0 to 100 percent.
min_dlci Minimum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_dlci Maximum DLCI to be used on this port. Range is 16 to 1023.
max_lcn Maximum LCN to be used on this port. Range is 1 to 1000.
cntrlr_id Enter a number that will be associated with the controller used by this partition. Range is 1 to 255.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-75Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfrscprtn
Example
The following example changes the default lower DLCI value to 16 and leaves all other resource partition values set to the default values.
PXM1E_SJ1.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfrscprtn 6 2 100 100 16 1023 1000 2
PXM1E_SJ1.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-76Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfslftst
cnfslftstConfigure Self-Test—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnfslftst command to enable or disable self testing and to configure how often the tests are run on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
cnfslftst -en <SelftestEnable> -tm <SelftestPeriod>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clrslftst, dspslftst, dspslftsttbl, runslftstno
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
The following example enables self testing and configures the testing to repeat every minute.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > cnfslftst -en 2 -tm 1
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
-en This option enables or disables self testing. Replace SelftestEnable with one of the following values:
• Disable = 1
• Enable = 2
-tm This option defines the period, in minutes, between self-tests. The range is 1 to 60.
Log: Yes State: Any Privilege: Any User
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-77Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfstdabrctrl
cnfstdabrctrlConfigure Standard ABR Control—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the cnfstdabrctrl command to set the standard ABR control options for the current FRSM card.
Note This command resets the FRSM card.
Syntax
cnfstdabrctrl <option>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspstdabrctrl
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Example
Configure the current card to enable both standard ABR control options.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfstdabrctrl 4
The Card needs to be RESET for the feature to take effectDo you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y
(session fell back)
PXM1E_SF.1.PXM.a >
Note The FRSM card will appear to hang when it gets reset. Press Return to force the switch to fall back to the active PXM1E card. When the card reset is complete, you can use the cc command to switch back to the FRSM card.
option Enter the number that corresponds to the control options you want to use:
• No RM cells & NO Mapping = 1
• NO RM cells, but mapping is enabled = 2
• RM cells are generated but NO mapping = 3 (default)
• Both RM cells and Mapping is enabled = 4
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-78Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnftrafficgen
cnftrafficgenConfigure Traffic Generation Test—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the cnftrafficgen command to configure a traffic generation test. This test is used for troubleshooting cell loss and is intended for use with defective connections. This test is enabled or disabled at a connection level, not at a card level.
Syntax
cnftrafficgen <channel> <action> <num_frames> <pattern_type >
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dsptrafficgen
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
channel Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
action One of the following actions:
• 1 = start
• 2 = stop
• 3 = abort
num_frames Number of frames.
Range: 1–40960000
pattern_type Pattern types.
• All zeros = 1
• All ones = 2
• All fives = 3
• All As = 4
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-79Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnftrafficgen
Example
Start traffic generation test on connection 16 using 50 frames and an all-ones pattern.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnftrafficgen 16 1 50 1
Wait for the prompt......Starting Test
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Example
Stop traffic generation test on connection Port 8, DLCI 16.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnftrafficgen 8.16 2 50 1
Wait for the prompt.......Stopping Test
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
4-80Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecnfunit391
cnfunit391Configure UNI T391—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the cnfunit391 command to change the current setting for UNI T391 timer on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
cnfunit391 <seconds>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspunit391
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Example
Configure the FRSM UNI T391 timer for 10 seconds.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cnfunit391 10
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
seconds Enter a timer value in the range of 2 to 30 seconds.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Super Group
4-81Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecopychans
copychansCopy Channels—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the copychans command to copy a channel configuration onto one or more channels. This command enables you to create and configure multiple channels from a specified “template” channel.
Syntax
copychans <template chan #> <start chan #> <start dlci> <# of chans> [<start remote VPI> <start remote VCI>]
Syntax Description
Related Commands
delchan, delchans
Attributes
Example
Copy slave connection 16 ten times, using starting channel number 16 and starting DLCI 89.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > copychans 16 17 89 10
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.108
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.109
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.110
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.111
template chan # Specifies the channel number you are using as a template. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
start chan # Starting channel number. Use the dspcons or dspchans commands to see which channels are already being used.
start dlci Starting DLCI number. You can use the dspcons or dspchans commands to see which DLCIs are already being used.
# of chans Specify the number of channels you want to create using the template channel configuration.
start remote VPI This option allows you to specify a starting remote virtual path identifier (VPI) for the connections you are creating.
start remote VCI This option allows you to specify a starting remote virtual channel identifier (VCI) for the connections you are creating.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-82Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecopychans
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.112
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.113
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.114
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.115
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.116
Local Connection ID is : 4700918100000000001a492344000001015b0800.11.117
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
4-83Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecopyports
copyportsCopy Ports—FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the copyports command to create multiple ports on a channelized line. The first step is to create the port to be copied. Then use the copyports command to create the other ports.
Syntax
copyports <template port #> <start port #> <start time slot> <# of ports>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
delport, delports
Attributes
Example
Copy port number 70 five times, using starting port number 71 and starting time slot 5.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > copyports 70 71 5 5
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
Tip On a T1 line with 24 time slots, this command results in 6 ports (the original plus 5 copies). This means that each port must use 4 time slots or fewer. It is a good practice to create your template port using the lowest slot numbers so that you can copy the template port to create ports that use the higher slot numbers.
template port # Number of the template port to be copied.
start port # The port number to use for the first copy. Any additional ports will use numbers that are higher than this number.
start time slot Starting time slot for the first copy. Any additional ports will use time slots above this number.
# of ports Number of ports to create from the copy.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-84Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencecpstobps
cpstobpsCells Per Second (cps) to Bits Per Second (bps)—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
The cpstobps command displays a speed value in bps after you enter a speed value in cps. It also displays the formula the software uses to translate between ATM speeds, which are measured in cps, and Frame Relay speeds, which are measured in bps.
Syntax
cpstobps <cps>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Determine the Frame Relay speed that corresponds to 38 cps.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > cpstobps 38
bps = 10134 [formula used: ((cps*38400)/144)+1]
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
cps Cells per second. Enter a number in the range of 10 to 135000.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-85Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelchan
delchanDelete Channel—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delchan command to delete a connection by specifying its logical channel number. This number is assigned by the switch when the connection is defined with the addcon command. You can view connection channel numbers in the LCN column of the dspcons command.
Syntax
delchan <channel number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, dspcons, cnfcon, dspchans, cnfchan
Attributes
Example
Delete channel 29 on a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delchan 29(CHAN_DEL): Deleted Channel.. : 29
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
channel number Channel number as it appears in the dspcons command display.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-86Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelchanloop
delchanloopDelete Channel Loopback—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delchanloop command to delete a channel loopback from the current FRSM.
No messages appear on-screen after the command entry unless the command cannot execute as entered.
Syntax
delchanloop <port.DLCI|Channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addchanloop, tstcon, tstdelay, dspcon
Tip To view the loopback status of a connection, use the dspcon command and look for the line labeled ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState.
Attributes
Example
Remove channel loopback from channel 29 on a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delchanloop 29
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be placed in loopback using the format port.DLCI. The range for port numbers is:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 8 (12IN1-8S back card)
The DLCI range is 16 to 1023.
Channel Enter the channel number for the port as it appears in the dspcons report.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 4
4-87Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelchans
delchansDelete Channels—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delchans command to delete a range of Frame Relay connections by specifying the channel numbers. Channel numbers are assigned by the switch as each connection is defined with the addcon command. You can view connection channel numbers in the LCN column of the dspcons command.
Syntax
delchans <start chan #> <# of chans>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, dspcons, cnfcon, dspchans, cnfchan
Attributes
Example
Delete channels 32 through 33 on a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delchans 32 2(CHAN_DEL): Deleted Channel.. : 32(CHAN_DEL): Deleted Channel.. : 33
PXM1E_SJ1.1.25.FRSM.a >
start chan # Enter a channel number as it appears in the dspcons command display.
# of chans Number of consecutive channels to delete.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-88Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelcon
delconDelete Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delcon command to remove a connection from the FRSM card.
Syntax
delcon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, dspcons, dspcon
Attributes
Example
Delete connection 1.20 from a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delcon 1.20 (CHAN_DEL): Deleted Channel.. : 28
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be deleted using the format port.DLCI. The range for port numbers is:
• FRSM-8T1 and FRSM-8T1-C = 1–192
• FRSM-8E1 and FRSM-8E1-C = 1–248
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 2 (HSSI back card)
• FRSM-HS2/B: 1 to 8 (12IN1-8S back card)
The DLCI range is 16 to 1023.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-89Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelln
dellnDelete Line—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delln command to bring down a line.
Syntax
delln <line_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addln, cnfln, dspln, dsplns
Attributes
Example
Delete line 8 on a FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > delln 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
line_num Number of the line to be deleted.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-90Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedellnloop
dellnloopDelete Line Loop—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dellnloop command to remove the line loopback feature from a line.
Syntax
dellnloop <line_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addlnloop, dspln
Attributes
Example
Remove line loopback from line 8 on a FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dellnloop 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
line_num Number of the line to be removed from loopback.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Service Group
4-91Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelport
delportDelete Port—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delport command to remove Frame Relay services from a line on an FRSM card.
Syntax
delport <port_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addport, cnfport, dspport, dspports
Attributes
Example
Delete port 16 on a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delport 16
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
port_num Number of the port to be deleted.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-92Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelports
delportsDelete Ports—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the delports command to remove a specified number of contiguous port configurations.
No messages appear on-screen with successful completion of this command.
Syntax
delports <start port #> <# of ports>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
copyports, dspports
Attributes
Example
Delete ports 3 and 4 on a FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > delports 3 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
start port # Start port number to be deleted.
# of ports Number of contiguous ports to be deleted.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-93Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedelrscprtn
delrscprtnDelete Resource Partition—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the delrscprtn command to delete a resource partition configuration.
Syntax
delrscprtn <port_num> <cntrlr_type> <cntrlr_id>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addrscprtn, cnfrscprtn, dsprscprtn
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
The following example deletes a resource partition from a port.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > delrscprtn 6 2 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port_num Port number from which to delete the partition. Use the dspports command to view the available ports.
cntrlr_type Controller for this partition. Enter 2, as the PNNI controller is the only controller supported in this release.
• PAR = 1
• PNNI = 2
• MPLS = 3
cntrlr_id Enter the controller ID assigned to the partition you are deleting. To display the controller ID, use the dsprscprtn command.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 1
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-94Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedncon
dnconDown Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dncon command to bring down a connection.
Note This command operates only on master endpoints.
Syntax
dncon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dspcon, dspcons, upcon
Attributes
Example
Bring down the connection on port 1, DLCI 32.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dncon 1.32
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be brought down using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons command.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-95Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspalm
dspalmDisplay Alarm—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspalm command to display the active alarms associated with a specific line on the current FRSM card.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
dspalm -ds1 <line>
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B (MGX-12IN1-4S back card)
dspalm -x21 <line>
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B (MGX-SCSI2-2HSSI/B back card)
dspalm -hssi <line>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clralm, clralms, dspalms
Attributes
Example
Display the alarms for line 2 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspalm -ds1 2
LineNum: 2 LineAlarmState: Alarm(s) On -- RcvLOS LineStatisticalAlarmState: No Statistical Alarms
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line Line number for the line you want to display. Use dsplns to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-96Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspalmcnf
dspalmcnfDisplay Alarm Configuration—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspalmcnf command to display the alarm configuration for a specified line.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
dspalmcnf -ds1 <line>
Syntax: FRSM-HS2/B
dspalmcnf -x21 <line>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the alarm configuration for line 2 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspalmcnf -ds1 2
Severity AlarmUpCount AlarmDnCount AlarmThreshold Line Red / RAIS NE / FE NE / FE NE / FE ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- 30.2 Major/Minor 6/6 1/1 1500/1500
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line Line number for the line you want to display the alarm configuration. Use the dsplns command to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-97Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspalmcnt
dspalmcntDisplay Alarm Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspalmcnt command to display the alarm counters for a line on the current FRSM card. The alarm counters indicate how many times each type of active alarm has occurred since the counters were last reset.
Syntax: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
dspalmcnt -ds1 <line>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clralmcnt
Attributes
Example
Display the alarm counters for line 2 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspalmcnt -ds1 2
Line RcvLOSCount RcvOOFCount RcvRAICount RcvFECount ---- ----------- ----------- ----------- ---------- 30.2 1 1 0 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
line Line number for the line for which you want to display the alarm counters. Use the dsplns command to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-98Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspalms
dspalmsDisplay Alarms—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspalms command to display a summary of the active line alarms on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspalms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clralm, clralms, dspalm
Attributes
Example
Display the line alarms on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspalms -ds1
Line AlarmState StatisticalAlarmState ---- ----------- --------------------- 30.2 Alarm(s) On No Statistical Alarms 30.3 No Alarms No Statistical Alarms 30.4 No Alarms No Statistical Alarms 30.5 No Alarms No Statistical Alarms 30.6 No Alarms No Statistical Alarms 30.7 No Alarms No Statistical Alarms 30.8 Alarm(s) On No Statistical Alarms
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-99Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspbufoverflow
dspbufoverflowDisplay Buffer Overflow—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspbufoverflow command to display the value of the FRSM data receive buffer overflow.
Syntax
dspbufoverflow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the FRSM data receive buffer overflow.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspbufoverflow
Data Receive Buffer Overflow: 0x00000000
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Super Group
4-100Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcd
dspcdDisplay Card—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspcd command to display information regarding the hardware, software, and operational status of the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspcd
Note You can also display card information by entering the dspcd command on the PXM1E with the appropriate slot number. For example: dspcd 30. The command report that appears is different from the report that appears when you enter the dspcd command on the FRSM card.
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
version
Attributes
Example
Display information for the current FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dspcd
ModuleSlotNumber: 11 FunctionModuleState: Active FunctionModuleType: FRSM-HS2B-12IN1 FunctionModuleSerialNum: SAG05274SFR FunctionModuleHWRev: ex FunctionModuleFWRev: 020.000.001.046-A FunctionModuleResetReason: Reset by PXM LineModuleType: LM-12in1-8s LineModuleState: Present mibVersionNumber: 80 configChangeTypeBitMap: CardCnfChng, LineCnfChng cardIntegratedAlarm: Major cardMajorAlarmBitMap: Line Alarm cardMinorAlarmBitMap: Channel failure
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-101Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcd
Front Card Info
pcb part no-(800 level): 800-17066-01 pcb part no-(73 level): 73-06948-01 pcb revision (800 level): 02 fab par no-(28 level): 28-05059-01 pcb serial no: SAG05274SFR clei code: 0 manufacturing eng: 0x0 rma test history1: 0x0 rma test history2: 0x0 rma history: 0x0 platform features: 0x1 self test result: 0x0 Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Back Card Info
pcb part no-(800 level): 800-12345-01 pcb part no-(73 level): 73-01234-01 pcb revision (800 level): 02 fab par no-(28 level): 28-01234-01 pcb serial no: 123456 clei code: 00 manufacturing eng: 0x0 rma test history1: 0x0 rma test history2: 0x0 rma history: 0x0 PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
4-102Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcderrs
dspcderrsDisplay Hardware Errors in BRAM—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspcderrs command to display card-related errors on a FRSM card. No response messages appear on screen when there are no errors.
Syntax
dspcderrs
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrcderrs
Attributes
Example
Display any card errors for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcderrs
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-103Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchan
dspchanDisplay Connection Using Channel Number—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspchan command to display configuration and operation data for connection. This command produces the same report as the dspcon command, but you can specify the connection using the channel number instead of using the port and DLCI numbers.
Syntax
dspchan <channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspchans, dspcons, tstcon, upcon
Attributes
Example
Display the connection on channel 19.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspchan 19
------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 19 RowStatus: Mod AdmnState: Up ChanState: Ok ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- PORT-ALARM CTRLR-ABIT E-AIS/RDI LMI-ABIT RAS FAIL ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO NO NO NO NO ------------------------------------------------------
ChanNum: 19 ChanRowStatus: Mod ConnAdminStatus: Up ChanPortNum: 1 ChanDLCI: 32 EgressQSelect: Hi ChanServType: CBR IngressQDepth: 65535 IngressQDEThresh: 32767 IngressQECNThresh: 6553 EgressQDepth: 65535 EgressQDEThresh: 32767 EgressQECNThresh: 6553 DETaggingEnable: Disabled CIR: 32000
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-104Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchan
Bc: 5100 Be: 5100 IBS: 100 ICR: 0 MCR: 0 PCR: 0 RIF: 64 RDF: 16 Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 Cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16 ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState: Disabled ChanTestType: TestOff ChanTestState: Passed ChanRTDresult: 1 ms ChanType: NIW ChanFECNmap: setEFCIzero ChanDEtoCLPmap: mapCLP ChanCLPtoDEmap: mapDE ChanFrConnType: SPVC ChanIngrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrSrvRate: 32000 ChanOvrSubOvrRide: Do not apply CAC ChanLocalVpi: 30 ChanLocalVci: 51 ChanLocalNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30100 ChanRemoteVpi: 25 ChanRemoteVci: 51 ChanRemoteNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107cb0200 ChanMastership: Master ChanVpcFlag: Vcc ChanConnServiceType: CBR1 ChanRoutingPriority: 8 ChanMaxCost: 2147483647 ChanRestrictTrunkType: No Restriction ChanConnPCR: 120 ChanConnSCR: 120 ChanConnMCR: 10 ChanConnPercentUtil: 100 ChanConnRemotePCR: 120 cps ChanConnRemoteSCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemoteMCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemotePercentUtil:100 ChanServiceTypeOverride: disabled ChanServiceRate: 1334 xps ChanZeroCirEir: 0 bps ChanReRoute: False RemoteConnMBS: 1024 cells
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-105Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchancnt
dspchancntDisplay Channel Statistics Count—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspchancnt command to display statistics information for a connection.
Syntax
dspchancnt <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, clrchancnt, delcon, dncon, dspchans, dspcons, tstcon, upcon
Attributes
Example
Display the statistics for channel 19.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspchancnt 19
ChanNum: 19 ChanState: okay ChanUpTime: 4842
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- AbitState: Sending A=1 Off ATMState: Not sending any state Not receiving any state Total Frames: 0 0 Total Bytes: 0 0 Frames DE: 0 0 Bytes DE: 0 0 Frames Discarded: 0 0 Bytes Discarded: 0 0 FramesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 0 BytesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 0 FramesDiscXceedDEThresh: 0 0 Frames FECN: 0 0 Frames BECN: 0 0 FramesTagged FECN: 0 0 FramesTagged BECN: 0 0 KbpsAIR: 0 0
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-106Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchancnt
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- FramesTaggedDE: 0 0 BytesTaggedDE: 0 0 RcvFramesDiscShelfAlarm: 0 XmtFramesDiscPhyLayerFail: 0 XmtFramesDiscCRCError: 0 XmtFramesDiscReAssmFail: 0 XmtFramesDiscSrcAbort: 0 XmtFramesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtBytesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 RcvFramesDiscUPC: 0 XmtFramesInvalidCPIs: 0 XmtFramesLengthViolations: 0 XmtFramesOversizedSDUs: 0 XmtFramesUnknownProtocols: 0 RcvFramesUnknownProtocols: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-107Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchanmap
dspchanmapDisplay Channel Map—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspchanmap command to view interworking selection for the channel and the field mapping configuration for FECN, DE, and CLP.
Syntax
dspchanmap <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchanmap
Attributes
Example
Display the channel mapping for channel port 5, DLCI 36.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspchanmap 5.36
chanNum chanType FECNmap DEmap CLPmap ------------- -------- ------- ------ ------ 35 NIW setEFCIzero mapCLP mapDE
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-108Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchans
dspchansDisplay Channels—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspchans command to display a summary of all the connections on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspchans
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspcon, tstcon, upcon
Attributes
Example
Display the connections on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspchans
LCN Port.DLCI VPI.VCI Class Type M/S CIR DE EgrQ Admin Alarm ---- --------- ------- ------ ----- --- -------- --- ---- ----- ----- 0016 001.0100 30.0119 CBR NIW S 4800 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0017 001.0103 30.0122 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0018 001.1023 30.1042 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0019 001.0032 30.0051 CBR NIW M 32000 Dis Hi Up OK
Number of channels: 4
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-109Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchanstdabr
dspchanstdabrDisplay Channel Standard ABR Parameters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspchanstdabr command to display ABR parameters for a specific channel on a FRSM.
Syntax
dspchanstdabr <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanabrrates, cnfchanstdabr, cnfstdabrctrl, dspfeature, dspstdabrctrl
Attributes
Example
Display the Standard ABR parameters configured on channel 16.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > dspchanstdabr 16
ChanNum: 16 MCR: 38 cps PCR: 38 cps ICR: 38 cps RIF: 64 RDF: 16 Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-110Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchstats
dspchstatsDisplay Channel Statistics—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the dspchstats command to view current statistics associated with the specified channel.
Syntax
dspchstats <line>.<1stDS0>.<DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchan, dspchans
Attributes
Example
Display counters for line 1, 1st_DS0 of 4, and DLCI of 1000 for the current FRSM.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > dspchstats 8.1.16
LineNum: 8 PhysicalPortNum: 1 LogicalPortNum: 8 DLCI: 16
ChanNum: 16 ChanState: failed ChanUpTime: 0
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- AbitState: Off Off ATMState: Sending AIS OAM state Not receiving any state Total Frames: 0 0 Total Bytes: 0 0 Frames DE: 0 0 Bytes DE: 0 0 Frames Discarded: 0 0 Bytes Discarded: 0 0
line Line number to display. Use the dsplns command to view the lines in use.
1stDS0 First DS0, in the range appropriate for the interface.
• T1 range: 1–24
• E1 range: 1–32
DLCI Connection for which the statistics are to be displayed. Use dspcons or dspchans to view the DLCI value for a connection.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-111Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspchstats
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- FramesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 0 BytesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 0 FramesDiscXceedDEThresh: 0 0 Frames FECN: 0 0 Frames BECN: 0 0 FramesTagged FECN: 0 0 FramesTagged BECN: 0 0 KbpsAIR: 0 0 FramesTaggedDE: 0 0 BytesTaggedDE: 0 0 RcvFramesDiscShelfAlarm: 0 XmtFramesDiscPhyLayerFail: 0 XmtFramesDiscCRCError: 0 XmtFramesDiscReAssmFail: 0 XmtFramesDiscSrcAbort: 0 XmtFramesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtBytesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 RcvFramesDiscUPC: 0 XmtFramesInvalidCPIs: 0 XmtFramesLengthViolations: 0 XmtFramesOversizedSDUs: 0 XmtFramesUnknownProtocols: 0 RcvFramesUnknownProtocols: 0
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
4-112Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcon
dspconDisplay Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspcon command to display configuration and operation data for connection.
Syntax
dspcon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspchans, dspcons, tstcon, upcon
Attributes
Example
Display the connection on port 1, DLCI 32.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcon 1.32
------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 19 RowStatus: Mod AdmnState: Up ChanState: Ok ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- PORT-ALARM CTRLR-ABIT E-AIS/RDI LMI-ABIT RAS FAIL ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- NO NO NO NO NO ------------------------------------------------------ ChanNum: 19 ChanRowStatus: Mod ConnAdminStatus: Up ChanPortNum: 1 ChanDLCI: 32 EgressQSelect: Hi ChanServType: CBR IngressQDepth: 65535 IngressQDEThresh: 32767 IngressQECNThresh: 6553 EgressQDepth: 65535 EgressQDEThresh: 32767 EgressQECNThresh: 6553 DETaggingEnable: Disabled CIR: 32000 Bc: 5100 Be: 5100
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-113Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcon
IBS: 100 ICR: 0 MCR: 0 PCR: 0 RIF: 64 RDF: 16 Nrm: 64 Trm: 255 ms TBE: 16777215 Cells FRTT: 0 ms ADTF: 500 ms CDF: 16 ChanLocalRemoteLpbkState: Disabled ChanTestType: TestOff ChanTestState: Passed ChanRTDresult: 1 ms ChanType: NIW ChanFECNmap: setEFCIzero ChanDEtoCLPmap: mapCLP ChanCLPtoDEmap: mapDE ChanFrConnType: SPVC ChanIngrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrPercentUtil: 100 ChanEgrSrvRate: 32000 ChanOvrSubOvrRide: Do not apply CAC ChanLocalVpi: 30 ChanLocalVci: 51 ChanLocalNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107f30100 ChanRemoteVpi: 25 ChanRemoteVci: 51 ChanRemoteNSAP: 47009181000000000052190a4e00000107cb0200 ChanMastership: Master ChanVpcFlag: Vcc ChanConnServiceType: CBR1 ChanRoutingPriority: 8 ChanMaxCost: 2147483647 ChanRestrictTrunkType: No Restriction ChanConnPCR: 120 ChanConnSCR: 120 ChanConnMCR: 10 ChanConnPercentUtil: 100 ChanConnRemotePCR: 120 cps ChanConnRemoteSCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemoteMCR: 10 cps ChanConnRemotePercentUtil:100 ChanServiceTypeOverride: disabled ChanServiceRate: 1334 xps ChanZeroCirEir: 0 bps ChanReRoute: False RemoteConnMBS: 1024 cells
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-114Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcons
dspconsDisplay Connections—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspcons command to display a summary of all the connections on the current FRSM card. There are no required parameters for this command. The command options allow you to customize the report the command displays.
Syntax
dspcons [-h] [-chn <ChanNum>] [-pt <PortNum>] [-dlci <DLCI>] [-locvpi <localVpi>] [-locvci <localVci>] [-sertp <ChanServType>] [-cntp <chantype>] [-master <masterShip>] [-cir <CIR>] [-detag <DETaggingEnable>] [-eqsel <EgressQSelect>] [-admin <ConnAdminStatus>] [-alarm <ConnAlarmStatus>]
Syntax Description
-h Display the list of command options.
-chn Channel number. Use this option to limit the display to a specific channel. To view the configured channel numbers, use the dspcons command without any options.
-pt Port number. This option limits the display to the connections on the specified port. To view the configured ports, use the dspports command.
-dlci DLCI number. Use this option to limit the display to a specific DLCI number. To view the configured DLCI numbers, use the dspcons command without any options.
-locvpi Local VPI number. This option limits the display to the connections that use the specified local VPI number. To view the configured VPI numbers, use the dspcons command without any options.
-locvci Local VCI number. This option limits the display to the connections that use the specified local VCI number. To view the configured VCI numbers, use the dspcons command without any options.
-sertp Channel service type. Use this option to limit the display to connections that use a particular ATM service type. To select the service type, enter the option with one of the following keywords:
• CBR
• rtVBR
• nrtVBR
• fstABR
• UBR
• stdABR
4-115Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcons
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspcon, tstcon, upcon
Attributes
-cntp Channel type. Use this option to limit the display to connections that use a specific channel type. To select the channel type, enter the option with one of the following keywords:
• NIW = Frame Relay to ATM network interworking (FRF.5—default)
• SIW-trsp = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) transparent (FRF.8, no protocol ID translation)
• SIW-Xlat = Frame Relay to ATM service interworking (SIW) translational (FRF.8, protocol ID translation)
• FUNI-mode-1a = ATM Forum FUNI mode 1A
• frForward = Frame forwarding (no translation or mapping of header contents, CRC evaluated)
-master Mastership. This option allows you to limit the display to connections for which the local endpoint is either a master endpoint or a slave endpoint. To use this option, enter either -master master or -master slave.
-cir CIR. This option limits the displayed connections to those that are configured for the CIR value you enter with this option.
-detag DE tagging. Use this option to limit the display to those connections that either have DE tagging enabled or to those that have DE tagging disabled. To use this option, enter either -detag enabled or -detag disabled.
-eqsel Egress queue select. Use this option to limit the display to those connections that either use the high priority egress queue or to those that use the low priority egress queue. To use this option, enter either -eqsel hi or -eqsel lo.
-admin Administrative status. Use this option to limit the display to those connections that either are administratively up or to those that are administratively down. To use this option, enter either -admin up or -admin down.
-alarm Alarm type. Use this option to limit the display to connections that meet a specific alarm condition. To select the alarm condition, enter the option with one of the following keywords:
• OK
• PORT-ALARM
• CTRLR-ABIT
• E-AIS
• RDI
• LMI-ABIT
• RAS FAIL
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-116Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspcons
Example
Display the connections on the current FRSM card in the standard format (with no command options).
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspcons
LCN Port.DLCI VPI.VCI Class Type M/S CIR DE EgrQ Admin Alarm ---- --------- ------- ------ ----- --- -------- --- ---- ----- ----- 0016 001.0100 30.0119 CBR NIW S 4800 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0017 001.0103 30.0122 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0018 001.1023 30.1042 CBR NIW S 45000 Dis Hi Up CTRLR-ABIT 0019 001.0032 30.0051 CBR NIW M 32000 Dis Hi Up OK
Number of channels: 4
ChanNumNextAvailable: 20
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-117Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspegrq
dspegrqDisplay Egress Queue Parameters—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspegrq command to view the egress queue parameters for a specific port. This command is valid only when the egress quality of service feature is enabled.
Syntax
dspegrq <port_number> <serv_type>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfegrq, cnfegrservtype, dspegrqs, dspegrservtype
Attributes
Example
Display port egress queue parameters for port 1, service 1.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dspegrq 1 1
ServicePortNum: 1 Serv Type: 1 Queue Depth: 65535 Queue ECN Threshold: 6553 Queue DE Threshold: 32767 Max Bandwidth Increment: 0 portBytesDiscXceedQueFull: 0 portBytesDiscXceedDEThresh: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
port_number Specify the number for the port you want to view. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
serv_type Select the service type to view:
• Waited fair queue, highPriorityQ = 1
• Waited fair queue, rtVBRQ = 2
• Waited fair queue, nrtVBRQandABRQ = 3
• Waited fair queue, UBRQ = 4
• Ratio queue, highPriorityQ = 1
• Ratio queue, lowPriorityQ = 2
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-118Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspegrqs
dspegrqsDisplay Egress Queue Parameters—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspegrqs command to view the egress queue parameters for all the ports on a shelf. This command is valid only when the egress quality of service feature is enabled.
Syntax
dspegrqs <port_number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfegrq, cnfegrservtype, dspegrq, dspegrservtype
Attributes
Example
Display egress queue parameters for port 1.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dspegrqs 1
PortNum ServType Q Depth Q-ECN-Thres Q-DE-Thres BandWidth-Inc ------- -------- ------- ----------- ---------- --------- 1 1 65535 6553 32767 0 1 2 65535 6553 32767 0 1 3 65535 6553 32767 0 1 4 65535 6553 32767 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
port_number Specify the number for the port you want to view. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-119Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspegrservtype
dspegrservtypeDisplay Egress Servicing Type—FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspegrservtype command to display the current egress port queue servicing type, which is either weighted fair queueing or queue ratio.
Syntax
dspegrservtype
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfegrq, cnfegrservtype, dspegrq, dspegrqs
Attributes
Example
Display the egress queue service type for the current FRSM.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dspegrservtype
<<Egress Servicing Type : Weighted Fair Queue>>
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Super Group
4-120Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspfeature
dspfeatureDisplay Feature—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspfeature command to display the feature set supported on the current FRSM card. The feature sets that can be supported are:
• Channelized T1/E1 lines on FRSM-8T1-C and FRSM-8E1-C
• Rate control for standard ABR services
Syntax
dspfeature
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanabrrates, cnfchanstdabr, cnfstdabrctrl, dspchanstdabr, dspstdabrctrl
Attributes
Example
Display features of the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspfeature
Channelized: On Rate Control: On
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Strata Group
4-121Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsplcn
dsplcnDisplay Local Channel Number—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsplcn command to display the connection channel number when you know the port number and the DLCI for the connection.
Syntax
dsplcn <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchans, dspcons
Attributes
Example
Display the channel number for the connection using port 6 and DLCI 66.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dsplcn 6.66
LCN number is : 18
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-122Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspln
dsplnDisplay Line—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspln command to view the characteristics of a specified physical line.
Syntax
dspln <line_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addln, cnfln, delln, dsplns
Attributes
Example
Display line 2 on the current FRSM.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dspln 2
LineNum: 2 LineConnectorType: RJ-48 LineType: dsx1ESF LineEnable: Enabled LineCoding: dsx1B8ZS LineLength: 0-131 ft LineXmtClockSource: LocalTiming LineLoopbackCommand: NoLoop LineSendCode: NoCode LineUsedTimeslotsBitMap: 0x400 LineLoopbackCodeDetection: codeDetectDisabled LineBertEnable: Disable
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
line_num Line number for the line you want to display. Use the dsplns command to view the available lines.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-123Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsplns
dsplnsDisplay Lines—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsplns command to view a summary of all lines on the current card. To view more information about a single line, use the dspln command.
Note Interface type X.21 or V.35 is displayed for lines on a FRSM-HS2/B card.
Syntax
dsplns
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addln, cnfln, delln, dspln
Attributes
Example: FRSM-8T1
Display lines on the current FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a > dsplns
Line Conn Type Status/Coding Length XmtClock Alarm Stats Type Source Alarm ---- ----- ------------ ------ -------- ------------- -------- ----- ----- 25.1 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Mod/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No 25.2 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim No No 25.3 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.4 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.5 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.6 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.7 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Dis/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim 25.8 RJ-48 dsx1ESF Ena/dsx1B8ZS 0-131 ft LocalTim Yes No
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.25.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-124Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsplns
Example: FRSM-HS2/B
Display lines on the current FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > dsplns
Line LineType InterfaceType Rate Status Alarm ---- -------- ------------- ------------ ------- ------ 11.1 DCE V.35 48000 bps Modify Yes 11.2 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.3 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.4 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.5 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.6 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.7 DCE V.35 48000 bps Disable 11.8 DCE V.35 48000 bps Modify Yes
LineNumOfValidEntries: 8
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
4-125Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspm32eqthresh
dspm32eqthreshDisplay M32 Egress Queue Threshold—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the dspm32eqthresh command to display the M32 egress queue threshold value for a port.
Syntax
dspm32eqthresh <port_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnfm32eqthresh, dspports
Attributes
Example
Display the M32 threshold queue value for port 6.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspm32eqthresh 6
PortNum: 6 M32 Egress Queue Threshold : 6000
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
port_num Enter the port number for which you want to display the M32 queue threshold. To display a list of available ports, use the dspports command.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 1
4-126Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspmaptbl
dspmaptblDisplay Map Table—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspmaptbl command to view the line, port, and connection numbers assigned to Frame Relay connections on the current FRSM.
Syntax
dspmaptbl
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the map table for the current FRSM.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspmaptbl
PortNum DLCI ChanNum LineNum ------- ---- ------- ------- 8 16 16 8 8 89 17 8 8 90 18 8 8 91 19 8 8 92 20 8 8 93 21 8 8 94 22 8 8 95 23 8 8 96 24 8 8 97 25 8 8 98 26 8
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-127Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspmsgcnt
dspmsgcntDisplay Message Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspmsgcnt command to display the message counters for the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspmsgcnt
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrmsgcnt
Attributes
Example
Display the message counters for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspmsgcnt
RiscXmtCtrlMsg: 136596 RiscRcvCtrlMsg: 136591 SARXmtCtrlMsg: 136596 SARRcvCtrlMsg: 136591 SARCtrlMsgDiscLenErr: 0 SARCtrlMsgDiscCRCErr: 0 SARCtrlMsgDiscUnknownChan: 0 SARCtrlMsgLastUnknownChan: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-128Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspoamlpbk
dspoamlpbkDisplay OAM Loopback—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspoamlpbk command to display the status of OAM loopback tests on the current FRSM. The display indicates the connections currently under OAM loopback alarm.
Syntax
dspoamlpbk
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfoamlpbk
Attributes
Example
Display loopback when loopback is configured on the FRSM.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > dspoamlpbk
RasOamlpbkAllowedState: EnabledRasOamlpbkFrequency : 10
Following Channels are under Ras Alarm :
Channels 16 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 56 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 96 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 136 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 176 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 216 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 256 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 296 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 336 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 376 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 416 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 456 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 496 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 536 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 576 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 616 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 656 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 696 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 736 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 776 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 816 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-129Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspoamlpbk
856 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 896 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 936 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 976 : 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000
Syntax : dspoamlpbk
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
4-130Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspport
dspportDisplay Port—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspport command on a FRSM to view a detailed port configuration for a single port.
Syntax
dspport <port number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addport, cnfport, delport
Attributes
Example
Display port configuration for port 3 on the current FRSM8-T1.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspport 3
SlotNum: 30 PortLineNum: 3 PortNum: 3 PortRowStatus: Add PortDs0Speed: 64k PortDs0ConfigBitMap(1stDS0): 0xffffff(1) PortEqueueServiceRatio: 1 PortFlagsBetweenFrames: 1 PortSpeed: 1536kbps SignallingProtocolType: NoSignalling AsynchronousMsgs: UPD_UFS disabled T391LineIntegrityTimer: 10 T392PollingVerificationTimer: 15 N391FullStatusPollingCounter: 6 N392ErrorThreshold: 3 N393MonitoredEventCount: 4 EnhancedLmi: Off PortState: Active PortSignallingState: No Signalling Failure CLLMEnableStatus: Disable CLLMxmtStatusTimer: 0
port number Specify the number for the port you want to view. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-131Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspport
portType: frameRelay PortIngrPercentUtil: 0 PortEgrPercentUtil: 0 PortOversubscribed: False PortSvcStatus: Disable PortSvcInUse: Not In-Use PortSvcShareLcn: Card-based PortSvcLcnLow: 0 PortSvcLcnHigh: 0 PortSvcDlciLow: 0 PortSvcDlciHigh: 0
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00000000 PortNumNextAvailable: 1
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-132Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspportcnt
dspportcntDisplay Port Statistics Counter—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspportcnt command to view statistics information for a specified port on the FRSM.
Syntax
dspportcnt <port number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspport, dspports
Attributes
Example
Display port statistics for port 3 on the current card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspportcnt 3
PortNum: 3
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- Total Frames: 0 0 Total Bytes: 0 0 Frames FECN: 0 0 Frames BECN: 0 0 Frames Abort: 0 0 Buf Not Available: 0 0 KbpsAIR: 0 0 XmtFramesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 XmtBytesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 XmtFramesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtByteDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtFramesUnderrun: 0 RcvFramesDE: 0 RcvFramesDiscCRCError: 0 RcvFramesDiscIllegalHeader: 0 RcvFramesDiscAlignmentError: 0 RcvFramesDiscIllegalLen: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
port number Specify the number for the port for which you want to view statistics. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-133Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspportcnt
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- RcvFramesDiscXceedDEThresh: 0 RcvFramesDiscNoChan: 0 RcvFramesUnknownDLCI: 0 RcvLastUnknownDLCI: 0 RcvFramesTaggedFECN: 0 RcvFramesTaggedBECN: 0 RcvFramesTaggedDE: 0 Status: 0 0 StatusInquiry: 0 0 AsynchUpdate: 0 0 RcvInvalidRequest: 0 RcvUNISeqMismatch: 0 RcvNNISeqMismatch: 0 UNISignallingTimeout: 0 NNISignallingTimeout: 0 FramesCLLM: 0 0 BytesCLLM: 0 0 CLLMFailures: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-134Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspports
dspportsDisplay Ports—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspports command to view a summary of all ports on the current card.
Syntax
dspports
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
addport, cnfport, delport, dspport
Attributes
Example
Display ports on the current FRSM.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspports
Port Ena/Speed EQServ SignalType T391 T392 N391 N392 N393 Type Alarm ELMI Ratio -------- --- ----- ------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- -------- ----- ---- 30.3.3 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off 30.4.4 Add/1536k 1 NoSignalling 10 15 6 3 4 frameRel No Off
Number of ports: 2
PortDs0UsedLine1: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine2: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine3: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine4: 0x00ffffff PortDs0UsedLine5: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine6: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine7: 0x00000000 PortDs0UsedLine8: 0x00000000 PortNumNextAvailable: 1
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-135Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspportstats
dspportstatsDisplay Port Statistics Counter—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the dspportstats command to view statistics information for a specified port on the FRSM.
Syntax
dspportstats <line.1stDS0>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspchstats, dspportcnt
Attributes
Example
Display statistics information for port 1 on first DS0 of 12.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspportstats 3.1
LineNum: 3 PhysicalPortNum: 1Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
PortNum: 3
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- Total Frames: 0 0 Total Bytes: 0 0 Frames FECN: 0 0 Frames BECN: 0 0 Frames Abort: 0 0 Buf Not Available: 0 0 KbpsAIR: 0 0 XmtFramesDiscXceedQDepth: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
line Line number.
Range: 1–8
1stDS0 First DS0, in the range appropriate for the interface.
• T1 range: 1–24
• E1 range: 1–32
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-136Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspportstats
Tx Rx --------------- --------------- XmtBytesDiscXceedQDepth: 0 XmtFramesDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtByteDuringLMIAlarm: 0 XmtFramesUnderrun: 0 RcvFramesDE: 0 RcvFramesDiscCRCError: 0 RcvFramesDiscIllegalHeader: 0 RcvFramesDiscAlignmentError: 0 RcvFramesDiscIllegalLen: 0 RcvFramesDiscXceedDEThresh: 0 RcvFramesDiscNoChan: 0 RcvFramesUnknownDLCI: 0 RcvLastUnknownDLCI: 0 RcvFramesTaggedFECN: 0 RcvFramesTaggedBECN: 0 RcvFramesTaggedDE: 0 Status: 0 0 StatusInquiry: 0 0 AsynchUpdate: 0 0 RcvInvalidRequest: 0 RcvUNISeqMismatch: 0 RcvNNISeqMismatch: 0 UNISignallingTimeout: 0 NNISignallingTimeout: 0 FramesCLLM: 0 0 BytesCLLM: 0 0 CLLMFailures: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
4-137Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsprscprtn
dsprscprtnDisplay Resource Partition—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsprscprtn command to display the configuration of a specific resource partition.
Syntax
dsprscprtn <port number>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addrscprtn, cnfrscprtn, delrscprtn
Attributes
Example
Display resource partition configuration information for port 3 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dsprscprtn 3
Port User Status NumOfLcnAvail DlciLow DlciHigh IngrBW EgrBW CtrlrId ---- ------ ------ -------------- ------- -------- ------ ----- ------- 3 PNNI Add 1000 0 1023 100 100 2
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port number Specify the port number for the resource partition you want to view. The dspports command lists all configured ports.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-138Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspsarcnt
dspsarcntDisplay SAR Counters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspsarcnt command to display the Segmentation And Reassembly (SAR) counter statistics for a specific connection.
Syntax
dspsarcnt <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
clrsarcnt, clrsarcnts, dspsarcnts
Attributes
Example
Display the SAR counters for channel 35 on the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspsarcnt 35
SarShelfNum: 1 SarSlotNum: 30 SarChanNum: 35 Tx Rx --------------- --------------- Total Cells: 0 0 Total CellsCLP: 0 0 Total CellsAIS: 2296 0 Total CellsFERF: 0 0 Total CellsEnd2EndLpBk: 0 0 Total CellsSegmentLpBk: 0 0 RcvCellsDiscOAM: 0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-139Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspsarcnts
dspsarcntsDisplay SAR Counter—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspsarcnts command to display the Segmentation And Reassembly (SAR) counter statistics for all connections on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspsarcnts
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrsarcnt, clrsarcnts, dspsarcnt
Attributes
Example
Display the SAR counters for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspsarcnts
SarShelfNum: 1 SarSlotNum: 30 SarChanNum: 0 Tx Rx --------------- --------------- Total Cells: 0 0 Total CellsCLP: 0 0 Total CellsAIS: 0 0 Total CellsFERF: 0 0 Total CellsEnd2EndLpBk: 0 0 Total CellsSegmentLpBk: 0 0 RcvCellsDiscOAM: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-140Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspsarcnts
SarShelfNum: 1 SarSlotNum: 30 SarChanNum: 2 Tx Rx --------------- --------------- Total Cells: 715323 199945 Total CellsCLP: 0 0 Total CellsAIS: 0 0 Total CellsFERF: 0 0 Total CellsEnd2EndLpBk: 0 0 Total CellsSegmentLpBk: 0 0 RcvCellsDiscOAM: 0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Tip The display for each channel is repeated until all channels are displayed. For a more concise report, use dspsarcnt.
4-141Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspservrate
dspservrateDisplay Service Rate—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspservrate command to view the service rate in cells per second on the selected channel.
Syntax
dspservrate <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display service rate on channe17 of the current card.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > dspservrate 17
Service Rate (cells/sec): 375
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be displayed using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be displayed. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Super Group
4-142Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspslftst
dspslftstDisplay Self-Test—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspslftst command to view the self-test configuration and status on the current card.
Syntax
dspslftst
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrslftst, cnfslftst, dspslftsttbl, runslftstno
Attributes
Example
Display self-test configuration and status for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspslftst
SelfTestEnable: Disable SelfTestPeriod: 5 SelfTestState: SelfTest Passed SelfTestResultDescription: No failure information available
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-143Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspslftsttbl
dspslftsttblDisplay Self-Test Table—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspslftsttbl command to view the self tests the card can perform, view the configuration for the tests, and determine if a test resets the card or is destructive to existing connections.
Syntax
dspslftsttbl
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrslftst, cnfslftst, dspslftst, runslftstno
Attributes
Example
Show the tests, test configuration, and test results for the current FRSM.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dspslftsttbl Test # Test Name Thold Fail Pass Last Enab Destr Card Rst 1 DRAM access test 1 0 0 P Y N Y 2 SRAM access test 1 0 0 P Y N Y 3 GRAM access test 1 0 0 P Y N Y 4 BRAM checksum test 1 0 0 P Y N Y 5 CODE checksum test 1 0 0 P Y N Y 6 Line loopback test 1 0 0 P Y Y Y 7 M32 test 1 0 0 P Y Y N 8 Data loopback test 1 0 0 P N Y Y 9 CellBus test 1 0 0 P Y N N
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-144Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspstatparms
dspstatparmsDisplay Statistics Parameters—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dspstatparms command to display the statistics parameters for the current card.
Syntax
dspstatparms
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the statistics parameters for the current card.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspstatparmsTFTP Retry Count: 1TFTP ACK time-out (sec): 60Bucket Interval: 0File Interval: 0Peak Enable Flag: DisabledObject Count: 0 STATS COLLECTION: DisabledObject Subtype Counts: 0 0 0 0Total File Memory Used: 0Number of File Allocated: 0Current File Size: 0Stat Memory Allocated: 0Auto Memory Allocated: 0Auto Mem Rgn Size: 2200000
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-145Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspstdabrctrl
dspstdabrctrlDisplay Standard ABR Control—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the dspstdabrctrl command to display the standard ABR control configuration for the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspstdabrctrl
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfchanabrparams, cnfchanabrrates, cnfchanstdabr, cnfstdabrctrl, dspchanstdabr, dspfeature
Attributes
Example
Display the standard ABR control options that are configured for the current card.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspstdabrctrl
RM Cell Generation: EnabledCLP,EFCI Mapping: Disabled
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: Yes State: Any Privilege: Group 2
4-146Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsptaskinfo
dsptaskinfoDisplay Task Information—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsptaskinfo command to display operational statistics about internal card processes.
Syntax
dsptaskinfo
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
clrtaskinfo
Attributes
Example
Display task information for the current FRSM card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > dsptaskinfo
taskName msgReceivd msgSent msgSent lastSent lastSt lastSt Failed FailedTask Failed Failed MsgTyp Errno---------- --------------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ------ ------nmimRouter 0 30253 0 0 0x0 scm 114026 45927 0 0 0x0 pSNMP 0 1 0 0 0x0 cmm 15156 33022 0 0 0x0 conn_mgr_t 13286 36560 0 0 0x0 tFiled 217 218 0 0 0x0 tSmd 29979 24055 0 0 0x0 logd 31455 1 0 0 0x0 qRpc 0 1 0 0 0x0 alarm_task 0 9 0 0 0x0
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
taskName msgReceivd msgSent msgSent lastSent lastSt lastSt Failed FailedTask Failed Failed MsgTyp Errno---------- --------------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ------ ------oam 23932 6257 0 0 0x0 lmi_task 0 6257 0 0 0x0 clt 21125 1551 0 0 0x0 bertd 0 1 0 0 0x0 ras 0 0 0 0 0x0
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Service Group
4-147Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsptotals
dsptotalsDisplay Totals—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsptotals command to view totals for lines, ports, channels, and alarms for the current card.
Syntax
dsptotals
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes: FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Attributes: FRSM-HS2/B
Example
Show totals on the current card.
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a > dsptotals
total active lines = 4/8 total active ports = 9/192 total active chans = 2/1000
Card Alarms Summary: --------------------------------------- Alarm Type Major Minor ------------------ ----- ----- Card State Alarms: 1 1 Line Alarms: 3 0 Port Alarms: 8 0 Channel Alarms: 0 2 ---------------------------------------Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-148Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsptotals
Port Channel Table : # of channel assigned per port
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 <-- least significant digit 0 0 --- --- --- --- 1 --- 1 --- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 5 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 6 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 --- --- --- --- 8 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 9 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 10 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 11 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 12 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 13 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 14 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 15 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 16 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 17 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 18 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 19 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
8830-SF.1.13.FRSM.a >
4-149Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedsptrafficgen
dsptrafficgenDisplay Traffic Generation Test—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the dsptrafficgen command to display the status of a traffic-generation test. This traffic-generation test is used to determine and troubleshoot cell loss and is intended for defective connections.
Syntax
dsptrafficgen [1]
Syntax Description
Related Commands
cnftrafficgen
Attributes
Example
List all the connections that are under traffic generation test.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dsptrafficgen
Pvc Under Test : 168830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Example
Show statistics for connections that are under traffic generation test.
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dsptrafficgen 1
Pvc Under Test : 16Pattern type : 1( All 0's )Total Test Frames To Send : 50Total Test Frames Transmitted : 50Total Test Frames Received : 0
8830-SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
1 This option adds test statistics to the command display.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-150Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencedspunit391
dspunit391Display UNI T391—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C
Use the dspunit391 command to view the current setting for UNI T391 timer on the current FRSM card.
Syntax
dspunit391
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
cnfunit391
Attributes
Example
Display current setting for UNI T391 timer.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > dspunit391
System UNI T391 = 5 seconds
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-151Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command ReferenceHelp
HelpHelp—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the Help command to display a list of the commands supported on the FRSM card.
Syntax
Help
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Command list for the current FRSM-8T1 card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > Help
Command Logging State Priority-------------------- ------- ------ -------------------------? No Any Any UserHelp No Any Any Useraddchanloop No Active Group 4addcon Yes Active Group 2addln Yes Active Group 1addlnloop Yes Active Service Group (-1)addport Yes Active Group 1addrscprtn Yes Active Group 1addspvc Yes Active Group 2chkflash No Any Strata Group (-2)clear No Any Any Userclralm No Any Group 5clralmcnt No Any Group 5clralmcnts No Any Group 5clralms No Any Group 5clrcderrs No Any Super Group (0)clrchancnt No Any Group 5clrchancnts No Any Group 3clrmsgcnt No Any Group 5clrportcnt No Any Group 5
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-152Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencei
iInformation—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the i command to display information about software tasks that are running on the current card.
Syntax
i
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dsptaskinfo
Attributes
Example
Display task information.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > i
NAME ENTRY TID PRI STATUS PC SP ERRNO DELAY---------- ------------ -------- --- ---------- -------- -------- ------- -----tExcTask excTask 805e0cd0 0 PEND 800d7e48 805e0bd8 0 0tRootTask usrRoot 805e6be8 1 PEND+T 800d7e48 805e68b0 3d0004 3tShell shell 805de200 1 PEND 800be888 805dde00 3d0002 0tTimerTask timerTask 80487820 50 SUSPEND 800aef64 804877b8 0 0tSmCmdTsk1 cmdTask 80407bd8 50 READY 800b4390 804075d8 3006b 0tSmOutTsk1 smtermOutTas 80403970 50 READY 800be888 80403670 0 0scm scmMain 804865b8 55 READY 800af6a4 80486528 0 0NMIMmsgd routerMain 80483340 55 PEND 800d7e48 80483258 0 0NMIMpSNMP pSNMPMain 804810c8 55 PEND 800d7e48 80480fd0 0 0cmm cmmMain 8047ee50 55 READY 800d7e48 8047ed10 3d0004 0talarm alarm_task 8047c930 55 READY 800af6a4 8047c8a0 0 0tlmi lmiMain 8047a5b8 55 READY 800af6a4 8047a518 0 0tconn ConnMgrTask 80478340 55 PEND 800d7e48 804781a0 0 0oam OamMain 804760c8 55 READY 800af6a4 80475fe8 3d0002 0tFiled fileDeamon 80473e50 55 PEND 800d7e48 80473d28 0 0tSmd smtermd 80471bb0 55 READY 800be844 80471820 3d0002 0qird qir_reset_ta 80422fa8 55 DELAY 800af6a4 80422f18 0 61rtdd rtd_task 80420d30 55 DELAY 800af6a4 80420cb0 0 461logd logMsgTask 8041eab8 55 PEND 800d7e48 8041e9d0 0 0clt ConnectionLo 8041c818 55 PEND+T 800d7e48 8041c718 3d0004 90tRpc rpcMain 804160b0 55 READY 800d7e48 80415fb8 3d0004 0ras RasMain 8040bb10 55 DELAY 800af6a4 8040ba60 0 5tBgndCheck 80098b14 80409898 55 DELAY 800af6a4 804097c8 0 60tslftst slftstmain 8041a5a0 58 DELAY 800af6a4 8041a4e8 0 27479statsd tftpstatsTas 8046e608 60 DELAY 800af6a4 8046e570 0 2159bertd BertMain 80418328 100 PEND+T 800d7e48 80418238 3d0004 48resyncSmrm smrmResynchM 80413db8 100 DELAY 800af6a4 80413ca8 0 4294393753
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Service Group
4-153Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencei
resyncSmrp smrpMsgHandl 8040ffe0 100 PEND 800d7e48 8040fee0 0 0resyncSmrc smrcStartFin 8040dd78 100 PEND 800be888 8040dce0 0 0
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
4-154Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command ReferencememShow
memShowMemory Show—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the memShow command to display information regarding memory usage by the current card.
Syntax
memShow
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display memory usage for the current card.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > memShow status bytes blocks avg block max block ------ --------- -------- ---------- ----------current free 503136 4 125784 393776 alloc 2168448 8203 264 -cumulative alloc 2982528 10285 289 -
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-155Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencemyid
myidMy ID—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the myid command to show the user name that you used to log into the switch.
Syntax
myid
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the user name used for log in.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > myidsuperuser
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-156Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command ReferencequeDsp
queDspQueue Display—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the queDsp command to show the current ingress and egress queue lengths for a specific connection.
Syntax
queDsp <chan_num>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Display the ingress and egress queue depths for channel 18.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > queDsp 18
ingreeQlen/egressQlen <0, 0>
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
chan_num Specifies the channel number you are configuring. To view the channels on the current card, use the dspcons or dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Any User
4-157Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencerrtcon
rrtconReroute Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the rrtcon command to reroute a connection between two different switches.
Note This command operates only on master endpoints and on connections between two different switches. This command does not reroute DAX connections, which are connections between two interfaces on the same switch.
Syntax
rrtcon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dncon, upcon
Attributes
Example
Reroute the connection on port 1, DLCI 32.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > rrtcon 1.32
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be rerouted using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons command.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-158Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencerunslftstno
runslftstnoRun Self Test Number—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the runslftstno command to execute one of the self tests on the FRSM card. To display a list of the self tests, enter this command without parameters or enter the dspslftsttbl command.
Syntax
runslftstno <test_no>
Syntax Description
Caution Some tests reset the card or interrupt connections. These tests are identified in the dspslftsttbl command display.
Related Commands
clrslftst, cnfslftst, dspslftst, dspslftsttbl
Attributes
Example
Run self test number 9.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > runslftstno 9Test Number 9 Result: PASS
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
test_no Enter the number of the test you want to run.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-159Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencesetcmdc
setcmdcSet Command Completion—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the setcmdc command to enable or disable the command completion feature. When enabled, this feature responds to incomplete commands by displaying a list of commands that match the incomplete command entry.
Syntax
setcmdc <on|off>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Enable the command completion feature.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > setcmdc on
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
<on|off> Specify on to enable command completion, or specify off to disable this feature.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-160Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencesetpagemode
setpagemodeSet Page Mode—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the setpagemode command to enable or disable the paging feature. When the paging feature is enabled, commands display information in pages that do not exceed the length of the display. If a command report requires more than one page, press Return to display the next page, or press Q to abandon the report. Non-paged reports display without interruption, but you may need to scroll up to see the information at the top of the report.
Syntax
setpagemode <on|off>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
None
Attributes
Example
Enable command report paging.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > setpagemode on
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
<on|off> Specify on to enable paging, or specify off to disable this feature.
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-161Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencetstcon
tstconTest Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the tstcon command to test the integrity of a connection you have created with the addcon command. The tstcon command sends a single collection of supervisory cells from the local to the remote end and displays a pass or fail message.
Syntax
tstcon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
dspcons, tstdelay
Attributes
Example
Test the connection on port 1, DLCI 32.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > tstcon 1.32
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > TestCon in progress.
TestCon Passed.
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be tested using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons command.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 4
4-162Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referencetstdelay
tstdelayTest Delay—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the tstdelay command to test a connection. This command displays the test result and the time it took to test the connection.
Syntax
tstdelay <port.DLCI|channel>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
tstcon
Attributes
Example
Test connection 18.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a > tstdelay 18
Corvette.1.11.FRSM.a > TestDelay in progress.
TestDelay Passed with 1 ms.
PXM1E_SF.1.11.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be tested using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
channel Specify the channel for the connection to be tested. You can view connection information with the dspcons and dspchans commands.
Log: No State: Active Privilege: Group 4
4-163Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceupcon
upconUp Connection—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the upcon command to bring up a connection.
Note This command operates only on master endpoints.
Syntax
upcon <port.DLCI>
Syntax Description
Related Commands
addcon, delcon, dncon, dspcon, dspcons
Attributes
Example
Bring up the connection on port 1, DLCI 32.
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a > upcon 1.32
PXM1E_SJ.1.30.FRSM.a >
port.DLCI Specify the port and DLCI for the connection to be brought up using the format port.DLCI. You can view connection information with the dspcons command.
Log: Yes State: Active Privilege: Group 2
4-164Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceversion
versionDisplay Versions—FRSM-8T1, FRSM-8T1-C, FRSM-8E1, FRSM-8E1-C, FRSM-HS2/B
Use the version command to view FRSM card software information, such as firmware version, operating system kernel version, and the date of the software build.
Syntax
version
Syntax Description
None
Related Commands
dspcd
Attributes
Example
Display version information on the current FRSM-HS2/B card.
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a > version***** Cisco System. FRSM-VHS Card ***** Firmware Version = 020.000.001.046-A Backup Boot version = VHS_BT_1.0.04_19Jul0VxWorks (for CISCO) version 5.3.1.Kernel: WIND version 2.5.Made on Mon Apr 29 02:03:54 PDT 2002.Boot line:sl(0,0)helium: e=192.9.227.1 b=192.9.227.1 h=192.9.225.10 g=192.9.227.2 u=frvhs pw=frvhs1 tn=vhs1card1
PXM1E_SJ.1.11.VHSHS2B.a >
Log: No State: Any Privilege: Any User
4-165Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Chapter 4 FRSM Command Referenceversion
4-166Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Release 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
Cisco Frame Relay Software Configuration Guide and Command ReRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
I N D E X
Symbols
? command 4-6
A
ABR rate control feature 4-121
addchanloop 4-7
addcon 2-14, 2-22, 4-9
addln 2-6, 4-15
addlnloop 4-16
addport 2-10, 2-11, 4-17
addrscprtn 3-9, 4-19
addspvc 4-21
alarms
cards 3-3
connections 3-11
lines 3-6
ports 3-7
AMI line coding 1-3
ANSI T1.408 1-3
ANSI T1.617 Annex D 1-2
ANSI T1.618 1-2
audience, for this document xi
B
B8ZS line coding 1-3
back cards 1-1
C
cards
displaying general information 3-3
management commands 4-1
management procedures 3-2
software version and status 3-4
viewing alarms 3-3
caution
symbol, defined xxii
CCITT-16 CRC 1-2
channelized cards, identification 3-2, 4-121
chkflash 3-4, 4-27
clear 4-28
clear channel E1 1-3
clralm 4-29
clralmcnt 4-30
clralmcnts 4-31
clralms 4-32
clrcderrs 4-33
clrchancnt 4-34
clrchancnts 4-35
clrmsgcnt 4-36
clrportcnt 4-37
clrportcnts 4-38
clrsarcnt 4-39
clrsarcnts 4-40
clrscrn 4-41
clrslftst 4-42
clrtaskinfo 4-43
cls 4-44
cnfchan 4-45
cnfchanabrparams 4-46
IN-1ference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Index
cnfchancacoff 4-49
cnfchanegressq 4-50
cnfchaningressq 4-53
cnfchanmap 4-54
cnfchanpol 4-56
cnfchansrvrate 4-58
cnfclktype 4-61
cnfcon 4-62
cnfegrq 4-64
cnfegrservtype 4-65
cnfln 2-8, 4-66
cnflnloop 4-68
cnfm32eqthresh 4-69
cnfoamlpbk 4-70
cnfport 4-72
cnfportcllm 4-74
cnfrscprtn 3-10, 4-75
cnfslftst 4-77
cnfstdabrctrl 4-78
cnftrafficgen 3-14, 4-79
cnfunit391 4-81
commands
card management 4-1
connection management 4-4
line management 4-2
partition management 4-4
port management 4-3
session management 4-1
connections
deleting a connection 3-13
displaying a list 3-11
displaying a single connection 3-11
management commands 4-4
management procedures 3-11
See also SPVC
testing a connection 3-13
conventions, documentation xxii
copychans 4-82
copyports 4-84
Cisco Frame Relay Software ConfigurationRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
cpstobps 4-85
CRC 1-2
D
delchan 4-86
delchanloop 4-87
delchans 4-88
delcon 3-13, 4-89
delln 3-6, 4-90
dellnloop 4-91
delport 3-8, 4-92
delports 4-93
delrscprtn 3-10, 4-94
dncon 4-95
documentation
conventions xxii
objectives xi
organization xi
dspalm 4-96
dspalmcnf 4-97
dspalmcnt 4-98
dspalms 4-99
dspbufoverflow 4-100
dspcd 3-3, 4-101
dspcderrs 4-103
dspchan 4-104
dspchancnt 4-106
dspchanmap 4-108
dspchans 4-109
dspchstats 4-111
dspcon 2-23, 3-11, 4-113
dspcons 3-11, 4-115
dspcslftsttbl 4-144
dspegrservtype 4-120
dspfeature 3-2
dsplcn 4-122
dspln 3-5, 4-123
dsplns 2-7, 3-5
IN-2 Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Index
dspm32eqthresh 4-126
dspmaptbl 4-127
dspmsgcnt 4-128
dspoamlpbk 4-129
dspport 2-12, 3-7, 4-131
dspportcnt 4-133
dspports 2-10, 3-7, 4-135
dspportstats 4-136
dsprscprtn 3-9, 4-138
dspsarcnt 4-139
dspsarcnts 4-140
dspslftst 4-143
dspstatparms 4-145
dspstdabrctrl 4-146
dsptaskinfo 4-147
dsptotals 4-148
dsptrafficgen 3-15, 4-150
dspunit391 4-151
E
enhanced LMI 1-2
F
features
channelization 4-121
common to all FRSM cards 1-2
standard ABR rate control 4-121
frame forwarding 1-2
FRF.5 1-3
FRF.8 1-3
FRSM-8E1
back cards supported 1-1
features 1-3
identification 3-2, 4-121
maximum connections 1-1
Cisco Frame Relay Software ConfigurationRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
FRSM-8E1-C
back cards supported 1-1
features 1-3
identification 3-2, 4-121
maximum connections 1-1
FRSM-8T1
back cards supported 1-1
features 1-3
identification 3-2, 4-121
maximum connections 1-1
FRSM-8T1-C
back cards supported 1-1
features 1-3
identification 3-2, 4-121
maximum connections 1-1
FRSM card
compatible back cards 1-1
displaying general information 3-3
features 1-2
front and back cards 1-1
management commands 4-1
management procedures 3-2
maximum connections 1-1
software version and status 3-4
viewing alarms 3-3
FRSM-HS2/B
back cards supported 1-1
features 1-4
maximum connections 1-1
H
HDB3 line coding 1-3
Help 4-152
IN-3 Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Index
I
i command 4-153
ITU G.704 1-3
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A 1-2
L
lines
bringing down a line 3-5
bringing up a line 2-6
configuration of 2-7
configuration quickstart 2-3
displaying a list 3-5
displaying a single line 3-5
management commands 4-2
management procedures 3-4
managing alarms 3-6
valid line numbers 2-6
LMI 1-2
M
memShow 4-155
MGX-12IN1-4S back card 1-1
MGX-SCSI2- 2HSSI/B back card 1-1
myid 4-156
N
network interworking
See NIW
NIW 1-3
nonchannelized cards, identification 3-2, 4-121
Cisco Frame Relay Software ConfigurationRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
P
partition
See resource partition
permanent virtual circuit
See PVC
ports
adding a port 2-10
configuration quickstart 2-3
deleting a port 3-8
displaying a list 3-7
displaying a single port 3-7
management commands 4-3
management procedures 3-7
provisioning, preparation 2-2
PVC 2-4
Q
queDsp 4-157
R
resource partitions
adding a partition 3-9
deleting a resource partition 3-10
displaying a single partition 3-9
management commands 4-4
management procedures 3-8
modifying a resource partition 3-10
RJ48-8E1 back card 1-1
RJ48-8E1-R back card 1-1
RJ48-8T1 back card 1-1
RJ48-8T1-R back card 1-1
rrtcon 4-158
runslftstno 4-159
IN-4 Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Index
S
service interworking
See SIW
session
CLI commands 4-1
management procedures 3-1
setcmdc 4-160
setpagemode 4-161
SIW 1-3
SMB-8E1 back card 1-1
SMB-8E1-R back card 1-1
soft permanent virtual circuits
See SPVC
software, version and status information 3-4
SPVC 2-4
configuration of 2-13
configuring master side of 2-21
configuring slave side of 2-14
FRSM-to-FRSM configuration quickstart 2-4
FRSM-to-non-FRSM configuration quickstart 2-4
See also connections
standard ABR rate control feature 4-121
T
tstcon 3-13, 4-162
tstdelay 3-14, 4-163
U
upcon 4-164
V
version 3-4, 4-165
Cisco Frame Relay Software ConfigurationRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
W
warning
definition xxiii
IN-5 Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)
Index
Cisco Frame Relay Software ConfigurationRelease 3, Part Number 78-14255-01 Rev. B0, October 2002
IN-6Guide and Command Reference for MGX Switches (PXM1E)